JP7526062B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine that can be controlled to create an advantageous state for the player.

In some conventional gaming machines, a meter whose display state can change from level 1 to bell 4 is displayed on an image display device, and when the display state of the meter reaches level 4, one of a number of super reach reach effects is executed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2015-221121 A

However, in Patent Document 1, only one of the multiple Super Reach reach effects is executed based on the meter display changing to level 4, which has the problem of not being able to increase interest in the game.

The present invention was developed to address these problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the player's interest in playing.

The gaming machine of means A is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as suggestion performances that suggest control to the advantageous state;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a first development performance before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
A chance-up effect execution means for executing a chance-up effect in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the number of times the effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect;
A revival special performance execution means capable of executing a revival special performance that notifies the player that the advantageous state will be controlled after the suggestion performance is executed and a performance result is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that notifies the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance before the special performance is executed;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance-up effect execution means includes:
the chance-up effect can be executed so that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed without being notified that the advantageous state will not be reached as a result of the first suggestion effect is greater than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed;
the chance-up effect can be executed such that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed after it has been notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a result of the second suggestion effect is equal to or less than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is being executed;
A first period during which the revival special effect is executed is shorter than a second period during which the fourth suggestion effect ends after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a result of the second suggestion effect,
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position before being hidden.
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can increase the player's interest in playing the game.
The gaming machine according to the first embodiment includes:
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion in which a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be reached as a performance result of the second suggestive performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion in which a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect A, and then the reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, and in the case where the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the special development effect, it is possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect before it is notified that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby improving interest in the game. Also, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

In addition, the embodiments for implementing the invention described below include the invention relating to the gaming machine of Means 2 below. Conventionally, there have been gaming machines capable of executing effects using movable bodies that can be operated, as shown in JP 2019-92949 A, and capable of executing effects similar to effects in which a movable body as a structure is moved by moving and displaying a pseudo-movable body display. However, such gaming machines have a problem in that they only move and display the pseudo-movable body in the same way as a movable body, and are unable to enhance the interest of the effects. In view of this, there is a demand for a gaming machine that can enhance the interest of the pseudo-movable body display.

The gaming machine according to the second means is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
a movable body movable from a first position to a second position different from the first position;
A performance execution means capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
a pseudo movable body display effect of moving the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position;
A movable body effect of moving the movable body from the first position to the second position;
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the rate of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period.
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo movable body display presentation.

The present invention may have only the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention, or may have the invention-specific matters described in the claims of the present invention as well as configurations other than the invention-specific matters.

FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine according to this embodiment. FIG. 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko game machine according to this embodiment. 1 is a configuration diagram showing various control boards etc. installed in a pachinko gaming machine. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a game control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a timer interrupt process for game control. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. A diagram showing the numerical range of a jackpot and the numerical range of a miss with time-saving in the variable display of the first special chart in normal state or time-saving state. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control main process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a performance control process. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table. 1A is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 11 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between variable display results and fluctuation patterns. FIG. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. This is a timing chart showing the performance period for each variation pattern. FIG. 1A is a diagram showing details of the presentation when a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation is executed, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a comparison between the early and late presentations. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an image display device. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram of a data retention area for game control. (A) is an explanatory diagram of the data holding area for performance control, and (B) is an explanatory diagram of the command buffer received at the time of starting winning. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a start winning determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a random number value determination process when a prize is won. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of normal special symbol processing. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variation pattern setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a special symbol stopping process. A flowchart showing an example of a jackpot end process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a pre-reading preview performance setting process. A diagram showing whether or not a pre-reading preview performance is executed and the determination ratio of the display pattern. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a meter effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a meter effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of each effect pattern. 11 is a timing chart showing the first to fifth timings in each fluctuation pattern. A flowchart showing an example of a reach effect E development suggestion effect determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a branch destination suggestion effect determination process. 13A is a diagram showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the decision ratio of the effect pattern, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram of the effect pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a reach effect G development suggestion effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a jackpot is hit, (B) is a diagram showing the reach performance decision ratio when a miss is hit, (C) is a diagram showing a comparison between reach performance C and reach performance D, (D) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a jackpot is hit, and (E) is an explanatory diagram of the difference in the decision ratio between reach performance C and reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ and the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ when a miss is hit. 13 is a flowchart showing an example of a chance-up effect determination process. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram of the period during which chance-up effects can be executed during each reach effect. 13 is an explanatory diagram of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects. FIG. (A) to (D) are figures showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed in each reach effect and the presentation pattern, and (E) and (F) are explanatory diagrams of the presentation patterns of the chance-up effects in each reach effect. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. A diagram showing the presentation style in the variable display of super reach. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an image display device according to a modified example. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating a change rate of the display mode of active display in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. A figure showing whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the determination rate of the effect pattern in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ in a modified example. An explanatory diagram of the length of the revival performance in a modified example. A front view showing a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic part 241SG. This is a configuration diagram showing various control boards and the like installed in a pachinko gaming machine as a characteristic section 241SG. 13A and 13B are diagrams illustrating examples of performance control commands. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. 1A is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 1, and FIG. 1B is an explanatory diagram showing a display result determination table 2. FIG. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing the contents of various jackpots. FIG. 13 is a diagram illustrating a variation pattern. 13A and 13B are explanatory diagrams showing the relationship between the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern. A diagram showing the execution periods of various effects in normal reaches and super reaches. This is a diagram to explain the content and configuration of various effects in Super Reach. This shows the expected probability of a jackpot depending on the execution status of development effects A and B. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing an outline of the development process of a pachinko gaming machine. 1A is a diagram showing a manner in which the mounted movable body moves, and FIG. 1B is a diagram explaining a situation in which the mounted movable body is lifted. 1A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body. 13A is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body. 1A is a diagram showing the movable range of the mounted movable body, (B) is a movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) is a diagram showing the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13A is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. 13 is a flowchart showing a variable display start setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the preview performance type determination process. 1A is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of preview performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance A, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance A. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of development suggestion effect, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of development suggestion effect. 1A is a flowchart showing the process of determining the type of advanced performance B, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the type of advanced performance B. 1A is a flowchart showing the process for determining the final performance type, and FIG. 1B is a diagram showing a table for determining the final performance type. (A) to (H) are figures showing examples of the performance operations of Super Reach β, mainly in normal reaches. (A) to (J) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly in weak super reaches. (A) to (F) are figures showing examples of the performance operations in a weak super reach. (A) to (D) are figures showing examples of performance actions mainly during strong super reaches. (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance operations of strong super reach performances. (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of presentation operations after a confirmed jackpot is announced. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display. 13 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED. FIG. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 13A to 13F are diagrams showing examples of the performance of preview performance B in super reach γ. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with the mounted movable body. 11 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display. FIG. 13A to 13D are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13H are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG. 13A to 13C are diagrams showing a third modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

(Basic explanation)
First, the basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which also applies to the configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of Pachinko Game Machine 1, etc.)
1 is a front view of a pachinko game machine 1, showing the layout of the main components. The pachinko game machine (game machine) 1 is broadly composed of a game board (gauge board) 2 that constitutes the game board surface, and a game machine frame (base frame) 3 that supports and fixes the game board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and game balls as game media are shot into this game area by a predetermined ball shooting device.

Note that the "variable display" of special symbols means, for example, a variable display of multiple types of special symbols (the same applies to other symbols described below). Variations include updating the display of multiple symbols, scrolling the display of multiple symbols, transforming one or more symbols, and enlarging/reducing one or more symbols. In the variation of special symbols and normal symbols described below, multiple types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of decorative symbols described below, multiple types of decorative symbols are scrolled or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are transformed or enlarged/reduced. Note that variations also include a mode in which a certain symbol is displayed flashing. At the end of the variable display, a specified special symbol is displayed stationary (also called derived or derived display) as the display result (the same applies to the variable display of other symbols described below). Note that the variable display may be expressed as a variable display or variation.

The special pattern variably displayed on the first special pattern display device 4A is also called the "first special pattern," and the special pattern variably displayed on the second special pattern display device 4B is also called the "second special pattern." A special pattern game using the first special pattern is also called the "first special pattern game," and a special pattern game using the second special pattern is also called the "second special pattern game." There may be only one type of special pattern display device that variably displays the special patterns.

An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the play area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 is composed of, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device) or an organic EL (electro luminescence) device, and displays various presentation images. The image display device 5 may also be composed of a projector and a screen. Various presentation images are displayed on the image display device 5.

For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, multiple types of decorative patterns (such as patterns showing numbers, etc.) that are different from the special patterns are variably displayed as decorative identification information. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, decorative patterns are variably displayed (for example, scrolled up and down or updated) in each of the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, 5R. The special game and the variable display of decorative patterns that are executed in synchronization are collectively referred to as simply variable display.

The screen of the image display device 5 may be provided with a display area for displaying a pending display corresponding to a variable display whose execution is pending, and an active display corresponding to a variable display that is being executed. The pending display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display-compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

The number of reserved variable displays is also called the reserved memory number. The reserved memory number corresponding to the first special game is also called the first reserved memory number, and the reserved memory number corresponding to the second special game is also called the second reserved memory number. The sum of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also called the total reserved memory number.

A first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B, each of which includes a number of LEDs, are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2. The first hold indicator 25A displays the first hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs. The second hold indicator 25B displays the second hold memory number by the number of lit LEDs.

A winning ball device 6A is provided below the image display device 5, and a variable winning ball device 6B is provided to the right of the winning ball device 6A.

The winning ball device 6A forms a first start winning hole that is always kept in a constant open state so that game balls can enter, for example, by a specified ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning hole, a specified number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the first special game can be started.

The variable winning ball device 6B (normal electric device) forms a second start winning hole that changes between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 3). The variable winning ball device 6B is, for example, an electric tulip-type device having a pair of movable wings, and when the solenoid 81 is in the off state, the movable wings are in a vertical position, so that the tip of the movable wings approaches the winning ball device 6A, and the second start winning hole is in a closed state in which the game ball does not enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in a closed state). On the other hand, when the solenoid 81 is in the on state, the movable wings of the variable winning ball device 6B are in a tilted position, so that the second start winning hole is in an open state in which the game ball can enter (also referred to as the second start winning hole being in an open state). When a game ball enters the second start winning hole, a predetermined number of prize balls (for example, three) are paid out and the second special game can be started. The variable winning ball device 6B may be any device that can change between a closed state and an open state, and is not limited to devices that include an electric tulip-type device.

At predetermined positions on the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, three locations are provided at the lower left of the game area and one location is provided above the variable winning ball device 6B), general winning openings 10 are provided which are always kept in a constant open state by a predetermined ball receiving member. In this case, when a game ball enters one of the general winning openings 10, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) are paid out as prize balls.

Between the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 7 has a large winning opening door that is driven to open and close by a solenoid 82 (see Figure 3), and the large winning opening door forms the large winning opening as a specific area that can be switched between an open state and a closed state.

As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door (for the special electric device) is in the OFF state, the large prize opening door closes the large prize opening, and game balls cannot enter (pass through) the large prize opening. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door is in the ON state, the large prize opening door opens the large prize opening, and game balls can easily enter the large prize opening.

When a game ball enters the large prize opening, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 14 balls) are paid out as prize balls. When a game ball enters the large prize opening, more prize balls are paid out than when a game ball enters the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, or the general prize opening 10, for example.

The entry of a game ball into each winning port, including the general winning port 10, is also called a "winning". In particular, a winning ball into the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port) is also called a starting winning port.

A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (the lower left of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is made up of a 7-segment LED or the like, and performs a variable display of normal symbols as multiple types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. The normal symbols are represented by numbers showing "0" to "9" or lighting patterns such as "-". The normal symbols may also include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such a variable display of normal symbols is also called a normal symbol game.

A pass gate 41 through which the game ball can pass is provided to the right of the image display device 5. When the game ball passes through the pass gate 41, a regular game is executed.

A regular symbol pending display 25C is provided below the regular symbol display 20. The regular symbol pending display 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the regular symbol pending memory number, which is the number of regular symbol games that are pending execution, by the number of lit LEDs.

In addition to the above features, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with windmills that change the direction and speed of the game balls, as well as numerous obstacle nails. At the very bottom of the game area, there is an outlet that takes in game balls that do not enter any of the winning holes.

Speakers 8L, 8R for playing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at the upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3. A main lamp 9a is provided above the image display device 5 on the gaming machine frame 3, and frame lamps 9b are provided on the left and right of the main lamp 9a so as to surround the playing area. Furthermore, an attacca lamp 9c is provided near the special variable winning ball device 7 on the gaming board 2.

A movable body 32 that operates according to the presentation is provided at a predetermined position on the game board 2 (a position above the image display device 5 in FIG. 1). The movable body 32 is also provided with a movable body lamp 9d. The movable body lamp 9d and the aforementioned main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, and attacca lamp 9c may be collectively referred to as the game effect lamp 9. The main lamp 9a, frame lamp 9b, attacca lamp 9c, and movable body lamp 9d are each configured to include an LED.

At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, a ball-hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 is provided, which is operated by the player or the like to launch the gaming ball toward the gaming area using the ball-hitting device.

At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area, a ball supply tray (upper tray) is provided to hold (store) gaming balls dispensed as prize balls or game balls lent by a predetermined ball lending machine so that they can be supplied to the ball launching device. In addition to the upper tray, the gaming machine frame 3 may also be provided with a payout section (ball supply tray) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper tray is full.

A stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached to a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the playing area. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. Operations on the stick controller 31A are detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 3).

At a predetermined position on the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a push button 31B is provided that the player can press to give a predetermined command. The operation of the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 3).

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a stick controller 31A and a push button 31B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's actions (operations, etc.), but other detection means may also be provided.

Figure 2 is a rear perspective view of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11, housed in a board case 201, is mounted on the rear of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The main board 11 is provided with a setting key 51 and a setting change switch 52. The setting key 51 functions as a lock switch for switching to a setting change state or a setting confirmation state. The setting change switch 52 functions as a setting switch for changing settings such as the probability of winning a jackpot and the payout rate in the setting change state. The setting key 51 and the setting change switch 52 may be attached to the outside of the main board 11, for example, at a predetermined position on the power supply board 17.

A display monitor 29 is disposed in the center of the back surface of the main board 11, and a display changeover switch 31 is disposed to the side of the display monitor 29. The display monitor 29 may be configured, for example, using a seven-segment LED display device. The display monitor 29 and the display changeover switch 31 are disposed directly in front of the main board 11 when the back surface of the game board 2 is viewed with the game machine frame 3 open.

The display monitor 29 can display winning information such as consecutive win ratio, winning ratio, and base. The consecutive win ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The winning ratio is the ratio of the number of winning balls that have entered the second start winning port (electric chute) and the number of winning balls that have entered the large winning port (attacker) to the total number of winning balls. The base is the ratio of the total number of winning balls to the number of game balls shot out. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 can display the setting values in the pachinko game machine 1. When in the setting change state or setting confirmation state, the display monitor 29 only needs to be able to display the setting values to be changed or confirmed.

When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52 cannot be operated from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. The gaming machine frame 3 is provided with a rotatable glass door frame 3a having a glass window, and is configured so that the gaming area can be opened and closed by the glass door frame 3a. When the glass door frame 3a is closed, the gaming area can be seen through the glass window.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1, a security cover 50A is attached to the right end of the outer frame 1a, which is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape. When the gaming machine frame 3 is closed, the security cover 50A covers the right side of the board case 201, including the setting key 51 and the setting changeover switch 52, from the rear side. The security cover 50A is a roughly L-shaped member including a short piece 50Aa and a long piece 50Ab, and may be made of a transparent synthetic resin.

(Outline of game progress)
The game ball is launched toward the game area by the player rotating the ball hitting operation handle 30 provided on the pachinko game machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game is started by the normal symbol display 20. If the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the period during which the previous normal game is being played (if the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 but the normal game based on the passing cannot be played immediately), the normal game based on the passing is put on hold up to a predetermined upper limit (for example, 4).

In this normal game, if a specific normal symbol (a normal winning symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal winning". On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than a normal winning symbol (a normal losing symbol) is displayed as a fixed normal symbol, the display result of the normal symbol will be "normal losing". When a "normal winning" occurs, an opening control is performed to keep the variable winning ball device 6B in an open state for a predetermined period of time (the second starting winning port is opened).

When a game ball enters the first start winning hole formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special symbol game is started by the first special symbol display device 4A.

When a game ball enters the second start winning hole formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game is started by the second special symbol display device 4B.

In addition, if the game ball enters (wins) the start winning hole during the period when the special game is being played or during the period when the game is controlled to the jackpot game state described below (if a start winning occurs but the special game based on that start winning cannot be played immediately), the special game based on that entry will be put on hold until a specified upper limit number (for example, 4) is reached.

In the special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, "7"; the actual symbol varies depending on the type of jackpot, as described below) is displayed as a confirmed special symbol, it is a "jackpot", and if a special symbol different from the jackpot symbol (a losing symbol, for example, "-") is displayed as a stopped symbol, it is a "miss". Note that "misses" in this pachinko game machine 1 include "misses with time reduction" that are controlled to a high base state (time reduction state) from the next variable display without going through a jackpot game.

After the display result in the special game becomes "jackpot," the game is controlled to a jackpot game state, which is an advantageous state for the player.

In the jackpot game state, the large prize opening formed by the special variable prize ball device 7 is opened in a predetermined manner. This open state continues until either a predetermined period of time (e.g., 29 seconds or 1.8 seconds) has elapsed, or the number of game balls that have entered the large prize opening reaches a predetermined number (e.g., 9), whichever comes first. The predetermined period is the maximum period during which the large prize opening can be opened in one round, and is hereinafter also referred to as the maximum opening period. This cycle in which the large prize opening is open is called a round (round game). In the jackpot game state, the round can be repeated until the predetermined maximum number of times (15 times or 2 times) is reached.

In the jackpot gaming state, the player can get prize balls by making the gaming ball enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the jackpot gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The more rounds there are in the jackpot gaming state, and the longer the upper limit opening period, the more advantageous it is for the player.

A jackpot type is set for a "jackpot." For example, there are multiple types of opening modes of the jackpot opening (number of rounds or maximum opening period) and game states after a jackpot game state (normal state, time-saving state, special state, etc.), and the jackpot type is set according to these. There may be jackpot types that offer many prize balls, jackpot types that offer few prize balls, or jackpot types that offer almost no prize balls.

After the jackpot game state ends, the game may be controlled to a time-saving state or a special state depending on the type of jackpot mentioned above.

In the time-saving state, control (time-saving control) is executed to shorten the average special symbol fluctuation time (period during which the special symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state. In the time-saving state, control (high opening control, high base control) is also executed to make it easier for the game ball to enter the second start winning hole by shortening the average regular symbol fluctuation time (period during which the regular symbol fluctuates) more than in the normal state and by improving the probability of a "regular symbol hit" in the regular symbol game more than in the normal state. The time-saving state is an advantageous state for the player because it is a state in which the fluctuation efficiency of special symbols (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

In the probability variable state (probability fluctuating state), in addition to time-saving control, probability variable control is executed, which increases the probability that the display result will be a "jackpot" compared to the normal state. The probability variable state is an even more advantageous state for the player, as it not only improves the efficiency of special symbol fluctuation, but also makes it easier to get a "jackpot."

The time-saving state or the probability of a special bonus state will continue until one of the end conditions is met first, such as the specified number of special games being played or the start of the next big win game state. The end condition of the state in which the specified number of special games have been played is also called a count-cut (count-cut time-saving state, count-cut probability of a special bonus state, etc.).

The normal state refers to a game state other than advantageous states such as a jackpot game state that is advantageous to the player, and special states such as a time-saving state and a probability-varying state, and is a state in which the pachinko game machine 1, such as the probability that the display result in the normal game will be a "normal hit" and the probability that the display result in the special game will be a "jackpot", is controlled in the same way as the initial setting state of the pachinko game machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed and the specified return process is not executed after the power is turned on).

The state in which probability variable control is being executed is also called a high probability state, and the state in which probability variable control is not being executed is also called a low probability state. The state in which time-saving control is being executed is also called a high base state, and the state in which time-saving control is not being executed is also called a low base state. Combining these, the time-saving state is also called a low probability high base state, the probability variable state is a high probability high base state, and the normal state is a low probability low base state. The high probability state and low base state are also called a high probability low base state.

The game state may change based on the game ball passing through a specific area (e.g., a specific area in a big prize hole) during the big win game state. For example, when the game ball passes through the specific area, the game state may be controlled to a probability variable state after the big win game state.
(Progression of the performance, etc.)

In the pachinko game machine 1, various effects (effects that notify the progress of the game or liven up the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effects are described below. The effects are performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5, but in addition to or instead of the display, the effects may be performed using audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting or extinguishing of the game effect lamp 9, the operation of the movable body 32, or any other effect device that includes some or all of these.

As an effect that is executed according to the progress of the game, in the "left", "middle" and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C and 5R provided on the image display device 5, a variable display of decorative patterns begins in response to the start of the first or second special pattern game. At the timing when the display result (also called the determined special pattern) in the first or second special pattern game is displayed statically, the determined decorative pattern (a combination of three decorative patterns) which is the display result of the variable display of the decorative patterns is also displayed statically (derived).

During the period from when the variable display of the decorative symbols starts to when it ends, the state of the variable display of the decorative symbols may become a predetermined reach state (a reach is achieved). Here, a reach state refers to a state in which the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed on the screen of the image display device 5 continue to be variable displayed when the decorative symbols that have not yet been stopped and displayed form part of a jackpot combination, which will be described later.

In addition, when the above-mentioned reach state occurs during the variable display of the decorative symbols, a reach effect is executed. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, multiple types of reach effects are executed with different rates (also called jackpot reliability or jackpot expectation) of the display result (the display result of the special game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbols) becoming a "jackpot" depending on the performance state. Reach effects include, for example, a normal reach and a super reach, which has a higher jackpot reliability than a normal reach.

When the display result of the special game is a "jackpot", a fixed decorative pattern that is a predetermined jackpot combination is derived as the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns on the screen of the image display device 5 (the display result of the variable display of decorative patterns is a "jackpot"). As an example, the same decorative patterns (for example, "7") are displayed stopped in line on a predetermined effective line in the "left", "center", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

In the case of a "probability jackpot" that is controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, odd decorative symbols (e.g., "7") are displayed in a line, and in the case of a "non-probability jackpot (normal jackpot)" that is not controlled to a probability jackpot state after the end of the jackpot game state, even decorative symbols (e.g., "6") may be displayed in a line. In this case, odd decorative symbols are also called probability jackpot symbols, and even decorative symbols are also called non-probability jackpot symbols (normal symbols). After a reach state is reached with non-probability jackpot symbols, a promotion effect may be executed that ultimately results in a "probability jackpot".

When the display result of the special game is a "miss," the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern does not become a reach state, and the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a non-reach combination (also called a "non-reach miss") as a "non-reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "non-reach miss"). Also, when the display result is a "miss," after the state of the variable display of the decorative pattern becomes a reach state, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may display a fixed decorative pattern of a predetermined reach combination (also called a "reach miss") that is not a jackpot combination as a "reach miss" (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be a "reach miss").

The effects that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute include displaying the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) described above. In addition, as other effects, for example, a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability is executed during the variable display of the decorative pattern. Preview effects include a preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display currently being executed, and a pre-reading preview effect that predicts the jackpot reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display whose execution is on hold). As a pre-reading preview effect, an effect that changes the display mode of the variable display compatible display (reserved display or active display) to a mode different from normal may be executed.

In addition, in the image display device 5, a pseudo consecutive performance may be executed in which a single variable display appears to be multiple variable displays by temporarily pausing the decorative pattern during the variable display and then restarting the variable display.

Even during a jackpot game state, a jackpot performance is executed to notify the player of the jackpot game state. The jackpot performance may include a performance to notify the player of the number of rounds, or an upgrade performance to show that the value of the jackpot game state is increasing.

In addition, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demo (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demo performance is executed).

(Board configuration)
The pachinko game machine 1 is equipped with a main board 11, a performance control board 12, a sound control board 13, a lamp control board 14, a relay board 15, and the like, as shown in Fig. 3. In addition, various boards, such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, and a launch control board, are arranged on the back of the pachinko game machine 1. Furthermore, a power supply board 17 is also equipped. The various control boards are not only electronic circuit boards such as printed wiring boards on which conductor patterns are formed and on which electrical components can be mounted, but also electronic circuit mounting boards configured to realize specific electrical functions by mounting electrical components on the electronic circuit board.

A power switch 91 is connected to the power supply board 17, and by operating the power switch 91 (turning it ON), power from an AC power source such as an external power source such as a commercial power supply, such as 100V AC, can be supplied from the power supply board 17 to electrical components including various control boards such as the main board 11 and the performance control board 12. The power supply board 17 is equipped with, for example, a rectifier circuit for converting alternating current (AC) to direct current (DC), and a power supply circuit for converting a specified DC voltage to a specific DC voltage (for example, 12V DC or 5V DC).

The main board 11 is the main control board, and has the function of controlling the progress of the above-mentioned games in the pachinko game machine 1 (execution of special games (including management of reserved games), execution of regular games (including management of reserved games), jackpot game status, game status, etc.). The main board 11 has a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, etc.

The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, a random number circuit 104, and an I/O (Input/Output port) 105.

The CPU 103 executes the programs stored in the ROM 101 to perform processes that control the progress of the game (processes that realize the functions of the main board 11). At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (such as data on fluctuation patterns, performance control commands, and tables referenced when making various decisions) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. The RAM 102 serves as a backup RAM in which the stored contents are preserved for a predetermined period of time even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped in part or in whole. Note that all or part of the programs stored in the ROM 101 may be deployed to the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

The random number circuit 104 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (gaming random numbers) used to control the progress of the game. The gaming random numbers may be updated by the CPU 103 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 105 is configured to include, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described below) are input, and an output port for transmitting various signals (signals for controlling (driving) the first special pattern display device 4A, the second special pattern display device 4B, the normal pattern display device 20, the first hold display device 25A, the second hold display device 25B, the normal hold display device 25C, etc., solenoid drive signals).

The switch circuit 110 takes in detection signals (such as a detection signal indicating that a game ball has passed or entered and the switch has been turned on) from various switches for detecting game balls (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23) and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The transmission of the detection signal indicates that the game ball has passed or entered.

The switch circuit 110 receives a reset signal, a power-off signal, and a clear signal from the power supply board 17 and transmits them to the game control microcomputer 100. The reset signal is an operation stop signal for stopping the operation of control circuits such as the game control microcomputer 100, and can be output using either a power supply monitoring circuit, an IC with a built-in watchdog timer, or a system reset IC. The power-off signal is turned off when the specified power supply voltage used in the pachinko game machine 1 exceeds a specified value, and is turned on when the period during which the specified power supply voltage is below the specified value continues for longer than the power-off reference time. The clear signal is turned on in response to, for example, pressing the clear switch 92 provided on the power supply board 17.

The solenoid circuit 111 transmits solenoid drive signals (such as signals to turn on solenoid 81 and solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the normal electric device and the solenoid 82 for the large prize opening door.

The main board 11 is connected to a display monitor 29, a display changeover switch 31, a setting key 51, a setting changeover switch 52, and a door open sensor 90. The door open sensor 90 detects the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, including the glass door frame 3a.

As part of controlling the progress of the game, the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) supplies presentation control commands (commands that specify (notify) the progress of the game, etc.) to the presentation control board 12 according to the progress of the game. The presentation control commands output from the main board 11 are relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the presentation control board 12. The presentation control commands include, for example, commands that specify various determination results in the main board 11 (for example, the display results of the special game (including the type of jackpot), the variable pattern used when executing the special game (described in detail later)), the game status (for example, the start or end of the variable display, the opening status of the jackpot opening, the occurrence of a win, the number of reserved memories, the game status), the occurrence of an error, etc.

The performance control board 12 is a sub-control board independent of the main board 11, and has the function of receiving performance control commands and executing performances (various performances according to the progress of the game, including various notifications such as driving the movable body 32, notifying errors, and notifying of power outage recovery) based on the received performance control commands.

The performance control board 12 is equipped with a performance control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I/O 125.

The performance control CPU 120 executes the programs stored in the ROM 121 to perform processing for executing performances together with the display control unit 123 (processing for realizing the above-mentioned functions of the performance control board 12, including determining the performance to be executed). At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 are used, and the RAM 122 is used as the main memory.

The presentation control CPU 120 may instruct the display control unit 123 to execute a presentation based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals that are output when an operation by the player is detected and that appropriately indicate the content of the operation).

The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), CGROM (Character Generator ROM), VRAM (Video RAM), etc., and executes the performance based on instructions to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120.

The display control unit 123 displays a performance image on the image display unit 5 by supplying a video signal corresponding to the performance to be executed to the image display unit 5 based on an instruction to execute the performance from the performance control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 and a lamp signal (a signal designating the on/off state of the lamp) to the lamp control board 14 in order to output sound synchronized with the display of the performance image and to turn on/off the game effect lamp 9. The display control unit 123 also supplies a signal to operate the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or to a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits that drive the speakers 8L and 8R, and drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, causing the speakers 8L and 8R to output the sound designated by the sound designation signal.

The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits that drive the game effect lamp 9, and drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the lamp signal, turning the game effect lamp 9 on and off in the manner specified by the lamp signal. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls the sound output and the turning on and off of the lamp.

The performance control CPU 120 may be configured to execute control of audio output, turning on/off the lamp (such as supplying a sound designation signal or a lamp signal), and controlling the movable body 32 (such as supplying a signal to operate the movable body 32).

The random number circuit 124 counts updatable numerical data indicating various random number values (random numbers for performance) used to execute various performances. The random numbers for performance may be updated by the performance control CPU 120 executing a specific computer program (updated by software).

The I/O 125 mounted on the performance control board 12 includes an input port for taking in performance control commands transmitted from, for example, the main board 11, and an output port for transmitting various signals (video signals, sound designation signals, lamp signals).

The boards other than the main board 11, such as the performance control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14, are also called sub-boards. As with the pachinko game machine 1, multiple sub-boards may be provided for different functions, or one sub-board may be configured to have multiple functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (function) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main Operations of Main Board 11)
First, a description will be given of the main operations of the main board 11. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and a game control main process is executed by the CPU 103. Fig. 4 is a flowchart showing the game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

In the game control main process shown in FIG. 4, the CPU 103 first sets interrupts to be prohibited (step S1). Then, it performs the necessary initial settings (step S2). The initial settings include setting the stack pointer, register settings for built-in devices (CTC (counter/timer circuit), parallel input/output port, etc.), and setting the RAM 102 to be accessible.

Next, it is determined whether the recovery condition is met (step S3). The recovery condition can be met when the clear signal is in the OFF state, backup data is present, and the backup RAM is normal. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, if the clear switch provided on the power supply board 17 is pressed, for example, an ON clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100. If such an ON clear signal is input, it is determined in step S3 that the recovery condition is not met. The backup data only needs to be capable of being stored in the RAM 102, which serves as the backup RAM for game control. In step S3, it is determined whether the recovery condition can be met by checking or inspecting the presence or absence of backup data and the presence or absence of data errors.

If the recovery condition is met (step S3; Yes), recovery processing (step S4) is executed, followed by setting confirmation processing (step S5). The recovery processing in step S4 sets a working area based on the contents stored in RAM 102. By setting the working area using the backup data stored in RAM 102, the game state when the power supply was stopped is restored, and if, for example, a special symbol was changing, it is sufficient if the change of the special symbol can be resumed from the state before the stoppage.

If the recovery condition is not met (step S3; No), an initialization process (step S6) is executed, and then a setting change process (step S7) is executed. The initialization process in step S6 includes a clearing process that clears flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102, and the execution of the clearing process sets initial values in the working area.

In the setting confirmation process of step S5, it is determined whether a predetermined setting confirmation condition is met. The setting confirmation condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting confirmation process of step S5 is executed when the recovery condition is met in step S3, including the clear signal being in the OFF state. Therefore, since the setting confirmation condition can be met only when the clear signal is in the OFF state, the clear signal being in the OFF state can also be included in the setting confirmation condition.

When the setting confirmation condition is met in the setting confirmation process of step S5, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting confirmation state in which the setting values set therein can be confirmed, and a setting confirmation start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting confirmation state, the setting values set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by viewing them on the display monitor 29. When the setting confirmation state is to end, a setting confirmation end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state, it may be in a game stop state in which the progress of the game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. In the game stop state, the launch of game balls by operating the ball-hitting handle, the detection of game balls by various switches, etc. are stopped, and the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, and the normal symbol display device 20 may be controlled to stop displaying a losing symbol or the like, or to display a symbol corresponding to a game stop state other than a losing symbol. When the setting confirmation state ends, the game stop state associated with it may also end.

In the setting change process of step S7, it is determined whether a predetermined setting change condition is met. The setting change condition is met, for example, when power supply is started, the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is in the ON state, and the setting key 51 is turned ON. The setting change condition may also include the clear signal being in the ON state.

When the setting change condition is met in the setting change process of step S7, the pachinko gaming machine 1 enters a setting change state in which the setting value set therein can be changed, and a setting change start command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. In the setting change state, the setting value is displayed on the display monitor 29, and the numerical value displayed on the display monitor 29 is updated and displayed sequentially each time the setting change switch 52 is operated. After that, when the setting key 51 is turned off by an attendant at the game center or the like, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 29 is stored (updated and stored) in the backup area of the RAM 102, and the display monitor 29 is turned off. When the setting change state is to be ended, a setting change end command is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be in a play stop state, just as when it is in the setting confirmation state. When the setting change state ends, the associated play stop state may also end.

When the performance control board 12 receives a setting check start command or a setting change start command, control may be performed to notify the user that a setting check or change is in progress. For example, a predetermined image may be displayed on the image display device 5, a predetermined sound may be output from the speakers 8L and 8R, or a light-emitting component such as the game effect lamp 9 may be illuminated in a predetermined manner.

The clear signal is turned on by, for example, pressing a clear switch provided on the power supply board 17. Therefore, when power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is on and the setting key 51 is on, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 and the setting change process of step S7 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 and the setting confirmation process of step S5 are executed, making it possible to control the device to the setting confirmation state. When power supply is started, if the detection signal from the door open sensor 90 is off or the setting key 51 is off, if the clear switch is on, the initialization process of step S6 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting change state, and if the clear switch is off, the recovery process of step S4 is executed but the device is not controlled to the setting confirmation state.

After executing the setting confirmation process or setting change process, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process to initialize the random number circuit 104 (step S8). Then, the register of the CTC built into the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt occurs periodically at a predetermined time (e.g., every 2 ms) (step S9), and the interrupt is permitted (step S10). After that, a loop process is entered. After that, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 at predetermined time intervals (e.g., every 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can execute the timer interrupt process periodically.

When the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process receives an interrupt request signal from the CTC and accepts the interrupt request, it executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 5. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 5 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process to determine whether or not detection signals have been received from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, and the count switch 23 via the switch circuit 110 (step S21). Next, by executing a predetermined main side error process, it performs an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko game machine 1, and can issue a warning if necessary depending on the diagnosis result (step S22). After that, by executing a predetermined information output process, it outputs data such as jackpot information (information indicating the number of jackpots), start information (information indicating the number of start winnings), and probability fluctuation information (information indicating the number of times the probability fluctuation state has occurred) that are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko game machine 1 (step S23).

Following the information output process, a game random number update process is executed to update at least a portion of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software (step S24). After this, the CPU 103 executes a special symbol process process (step S25). By the CPU 103 executing the special symbol process process at each timer interrupt, the execution and reservation management of the special symbol game, the control of the jackpot game state, the control of the game state, etc. are realized.

Following the special symbol process, the normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process at each timer interrupt, enabling the execution and reservation management of the normal symbol game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), and the opening control of the variable winning ball device 6B based on a "normal symbol hit". The normal symbol game is executed by driving the normal symbol display 20, and the number of reserved normal symbols is displayed by lighting the normal symbol reservation display 25C.

After executing the normal symbol process processing, as part of the game control timer interrupt processing, processing when a power outage occurs, processing for paying out prize balls, etc. may be performed. After that, the CPU 103 executes a command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may set a performance control command for transmission in each of the above processes. In the command control processing of step S27, a process is performed to transmit the performance control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the performance control board 12. After executing the command control processing, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt processing is terminated.

Figure 6 is a flow chart showing an example of the special symbol process executed in step S25 shown in Figure 5. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

In the start winning judgment process, a process is executed to detect the occurrence of a start winning, store the reserved information in a specified area of the RAM 102, and update the reserved memory number. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining the display result (including the type of big win) and the variation pattern is extracted and stored as reserved information. In addition, a process for predicting and judging the display result and the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value may be executed. After the reserved information and the reserved memory number are stored, a transmission setting is performed to transmit a performance control command to the performance control board 12 to specify the judgment results such as the occurrence of a start winning, the reserved memory number, and the predictive judgment. The performance control command at the time of the start winning that has been transmitted and set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process is completed, by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 4.

After executing the start winning determination process in step S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 depending on the value of the special symbol process flag provided in the RAM 102. Note that in each step of the special symbol process (steps S110 to S120), a transmission setting is made to transmit a performance control command corresponding to each step to the performance control board 12.

The normal special pattern processing in step S110 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "0" (initial value). In this normal special pattern processing, a determination is made as to whether or not to start the first special pattern game or the second special pattern game based on the presence or absence of reserved information. In addition, in the normal special pattern processing, based on a random number value for determining the display result, whether or not the display result of the special pattern or the decorative pattern is to be a "jackpot", and if it is a "jackpot", the type of jackpot is determined (pre-determined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the normal special pattern processing, a determined special pattern (either a jackpot pattern or a losing pattern) to be stopped and displayed in the special pattern game is set in response to the determined display result. After that, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "1", and the normal special pattern processing is terminated. Note that the special pattern game using the second special pattern may be executed in preference to the special pattern game using the first special pattern (also called special pattern 2 priority consumption). Also, the order in which the game balls enter the first start winning slot and the second start winning slot may be stored, and the conditions for starting the special game may be met in the order in which the balls enter (also known as winning order consumption).

When making various decisions based on random number values, various tables stored in ROM 101 (tables in which decision values compared with random number values are assigned to decision results) are referenced. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the performance control board 12. On the performance control board 12, various tables are stored in ROM 121.

The fluctuation pattern setting process of step S111 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "1". This fluctuation pattern setting process includes a process of determining one of multiple types of fluctuation patterns using a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern based on a pre-determined result of whether or not the display result is a "jackpot". In the fluctuation pattern setting process, when a fluctuation pattern is determined, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "2" and the fluctuation pattern setting process ends.

The variation pattern specifies the execution time of the special game (special game variation time) (which is also the execution time of the variable display of the decorative symbols), the manner of the variable display of the decorative symbols (whether or not there is a reach, etc.), and the content of the presentation during the variable display of the decorative symbols (type of reach presentation, etc.), and is also called the variable display pattern.

The special pattern change process of step S112 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "2". This special pattern change process includes a process for making settings to change the special pattern in the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B, and a process for measuring the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change. It also determines whether the measured elapsed time has reached the special pattern change time corresponding to the change pattern. Then, when the elapsed time since the special pattern started to change reaches the special pattern change time, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "3", and the special pattern change process ends.

The special pattern stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special pattern process flag is "3". This special pattern stop process includes a process for setting the first special pattern display device 4A and the second special pattern display device 4B to stop the fluctuation of the special pattern and to stop displaying (deriving) the confirmed special pattern that is the display result of the special pattern. If the display result is a "jackpot", the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "4". If the display result is a "miss", when the time-saving state or the probability bonus state is controlled and the end of the number-cutting is established, the game state is also updated. When the value of the special pattern process flag is updated, the special pattern stop process ends.

The pre-opening process for the jackpot in step S114 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "4". This pre-opening process for the jackpot includes a process for starting the execution of a round in the jackpot game state and setting the jackpot opening port to an open state, based on the display result being "jackpot", etc. When the jackpot opening port is opened, a process for supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening port is executed. At this time, for example, depending on the type of jackpot, the maximum open period for the jackpot opening port and the maximum number of rounds to be executed are set. When these settings are completed, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", and the pre-opening process for the jackpot is completed.

The jackpot opening process of step S115 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "5". This jackpot opening process includes a process for measuring the time that has elapsed since the jackpot opening was opened, and a process for determining whether or not it is time to return the jackpot opening from an open state to a closed state based on the measured elapsed time and the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23. When the jackpot opening is to be returned to a closed state, a process for stopping the supply of a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the jackpot opening door is executed, and then the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "6", and the jackpot opening process is terminated.

The post-jackpot release process of step S116 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "6". This post-jackpot release process includes a process for determining whether the number of times the round that opens the big prize opening has been executed has reached a set upper limit, and a process for making settings to end the jackpot game state when the upper limit has been reached. When the number of times the round has been executed has not reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "5", whereas when the number of times the round has been executed has reached the upper limit, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "7". When the value of the special chart process flag is updated, the post-jackpot release process ends.

The jackpot end process of step S117 is executed when the value of the special chart process flag is "7". This jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to the period during which an ending presentation is executed as a presentation operation that notifies the end of the jackpot game state has elapsed, and a process of making various settings for starting special rate control or time-saving control in response to the end of the jackpot game state. When such settings are made, the value of the special chart process flag is updated to "0", and the jackpot end process ends.

The pachinko game machine 1 is configured so that the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change according to the setting value. For example, in the special symbol normal processing of the special symbol process processing, the winning probability of a jackpot and the ball payout rate change by using a display result judgment table (winning probability) according to the setting value. For example, the setting value is made up of six levels from 1 to 6, with 6 being the highest winning probability of a jackpot, and the winning probability of a jackpot decreasing as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. In this example, when the setting value is set to 6, the player has the highest advantage, and the advantage decreases stepwise as the value decreases in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1. If the winning probability of a jackpot changes according to the setting value, the ball payout rate may also change according to the setting value. The winning probability of a jackpot is constant regardless of the setting value, while the number of rounds in the jackpot game state may change according to the setting value. The pachinko gaming machine 1 may be configured to be able to set one of a number of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player. The setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is notified by sending a setting value designation command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

Figure 7 shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table. Figure 7 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the first special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, and Figure 7 (B) shows an example of the configuration of a display result judgment table for the second special symbol used when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol. The display result judgment table is a collection of data stored in ROM 101. In the display result judgment table, a winning judgment value compared with the random number value MR1 according to a set value is assigned to the special symbol display result, which is the variable display result of the special symbol. The random number value MR1 is a random number value for determining the display result, and the value is updated randomly within the range of 0 to 65535. As the display result judgment table, a display result judgment table common to the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be used.

As shown in FIG. 7(A), when the variable special chart is the first special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and among the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65535 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, among the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that, when the setting value in the first special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(A).

As shown in FIG. 7(B), when the variable special chart is the second special chart, if the setting value is 1 and the game state is normal or time-saving, the value can be a number in the range of 0 to 65535, and of the hit determination values compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, 1020 to 1237 are assigned to "jackpot", 65317 to 65425 are assigned to "miss with time-saving", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Also, when the setting value is 1 and the game state is a probability variable state, of the hit determination values mentioned above, 1020 to 1346 are assigned to "jackpot", and the other numerical ranges are assigned to "miss". Note that when the setting value in the second special chart is 2 to 6 and the game state is normal or time-saving, it is as shown in FIG. 7(B).

Now, looking at the numerical range of hit determination values assigned to "jackpot" and "miss with time-saving" in each display result determination table, as shown in FIG. 8, in the display result determination table for the first special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit determination values from 1020 to 1237 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value from 1020 to 1346 is set as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65535 with 65317 as the reference value for time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the previous setting value of 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In addition, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in a special probability state, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot judgment values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1346 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1347 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1347 to 1383 for setting value 2, the range of 1347 to 1429 for setting value 3, the range of 1347 to 1487 for setting value 4, the range of 1347 to 1556 for setting value 5, and the range of 1347 to 1674 for setting value 6.

In other words, in the first special chart display result judgment table when the game state is in the high probability state, when the setting value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1346) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the setting value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1347 as the setting value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

In the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is normal or time-saving, the range of hit judgment values from 1020 to 1237 is set as the common numerical range of the jackpot judgment value for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value.

When the setting value is 1, only the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set (1020 to 1237 is assigned to "jackpot"), while when the setting value is 2 to 6, the numerical range corresponding to each setting value is set from 1238 as the non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value so as to be continuous from the common numerical range of the jackpot determination value. This non-common numerical range of the jackpot determination value is set to the range of 1238 to 1253 for setting value 2, the range of 1238 to 1272 for setting value 3, the range of 1238 to 1292 for setting value 4, the range of 1238 to 1317 for setting value 5, and the range of 1238 to 1346 for setting value 6.

In other words, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, in the second special chart display result judgment table when the game state is normal or time-saving, when the set value is 1, among the hit judgment values that can take a value in the range of 0 to 65535, only values within the common numerical range (1020 to 1237) are assigned to "jackpot", while when the set value is 2 or more, among the jackpot judgment values, values within the range obtained by adding the non-common numerical range to the common numerical range are assigned to "jackpot". Furthermore, the non-common numerical range increases with 1238 as the set value increases.

For this reason, the probability of a jackpot is increased by increasing the non-common numerical range that is adjacent to the common numerical range as the set value increases, with 1020 being the reference value for determining a jackpot (jackpot reference value).

Furthermore, in the display result judgment table for the second special chart when the game state is the normal state or the time-saving state, the range of 65317 to 65425 among the hit judgment values is set as the common numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value for judging a time-saving miss regardless of the setting value. If we focus on the case where the setting value is 6, as described above, the hit judgment value is set to 1020 to 1346 as the numerical range of the jackpot judgment value, and the time-saving miss judgment value is set to the range of 65317 to 65425 with 65317 as the reference value for the time-saving miss (time-saving miss reference value) in a numerical range different from the range of the jackpot judgment value of the setting value 6 (1020 to 1346), so that the numerical range of the time-saving miss judgment value is prevented from overlapping with the range of the jackpot judgment value that changes according to each setting value.

In the second special symbol display result determination table when the game state is in a special probability state, the hit determination value range of 1020 to 1346 is set as a common numerical range of jackpot determination values for determining a jackpot regardless of the set value. The other features of the second special symbol display result determination table are the same as those of the first special symbol display result determination table.

As described above, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, when the variable special symbol is the first special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65535 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, and when the variable special symbol is the second special symbol, the range of 65317 to 65425 is set as the common numerical range for a miss with time-saving, regardless of the setting value, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state. In other words, when the gaming state is normal and when the time-saving state, the rate at which the variable display result is a miss with time-saving is the same for all setting values, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from making the game excessively gambling-oriented. Furthermore, for the time-saving miss, which is assigned a common judgment value for each setting value, the setting is set to a continuous numerical range from 65317, which is the time-saving miss reference value, for all setting values, so that the processing load on the CPU 103 for determining whether the variable display result is a time-saving miss can be reduced.

In addition, in this pachinko gaming machine 1, six setting values can be set, from 1 to 6, but the setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be five or less or seven or more. Also, the smaller the setting value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the more advantageous it may be for the player.

The jackpot type may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the jackpot type judgment table. Alternatively, the jackpot type may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The fluctuation pattern may be determined at different rates depending on the set value, based on the allocation of judgment values in the fluctuation pattern judgment table. Alternatively, the fluctuation pattern may be determined at a common rate regardless of the set value. The execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may differ depending on the set value, so that the setting value may be suggested by the frequency at which normal reaches and super reaches are executed. Alternatively, the execution rate of normal reaches and super reaches may be common regardless of the set value. In addition, any setting suggestion performance may be possible at different rates depending on the set value.

(Main operations of the performance control board 12)
Next, the main operations of the performance control board 12 will be described. When the performance control board 12 receives a power supply voltage from a power supply board or the like, the performance control CPU 120 starts up and executes the performance control main process as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 9. When the performance control main process shown in Fig. 9 starts, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the registers of the CTC (counter/timer circuit) mounted on the performance control board 12. In addition, it executes an initial operation control process (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control is executed to perform the initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control to drive the movable body 32 to return it to its initial position and control to perform a predetermined operation check.

Then, it is determined whether the timer interrupt flag is on or not (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the on state every time a predetermined time (e.g., 2 milliseconds) elapses, for example based on the register setting of the CTC. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed and the system waits.

In addition, on the performance control board 12 side, an interrupt occurs to receive a performance control command from the main board 11, in addition to a timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time has elapsed. This interrupt occurs, for example, when the performance control INT signal from the main board 11 becomes ON. When an interrupt occurs due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt to be prohibited, but if a CPU that does not automatically become interrupt prohibited is used, it is desirable to issue an interrupt prohibition command (DI command). In response to an interrupt due to the performance control INT signal becoming ON, the performance control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process. In this command reception interrupt process, a performance control command is taken in from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15, among the input ports included in the I/O 125. The performance control command taken in at this time is stored in a performance control command reception buffer provided in, for example, the RAM 122. The performance control CPU 120 then sets the interrupt to permitted and ends the command reception interrupt process.

If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared to an off state (step S74), and a command analysis process is executed (step S75). In the command analysis process, for example, various presentation control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the presentation control command reception buffer are read, and then settings and controls corresponding to the read presentation control commands are performed. For example, the read presentation control command is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122, or a reception flag provided in the RAM 122 is turned on so that which presentation control command was received and the contents specified by the presentation control command can be confirmed by the presentation control process process, etc. In addition, if the presentation control command specifies the game state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background corresponding to the game state.

After executing the command analysis process in step S75, the performance control process is executed (step S76). In the performance control process, for example, control is performed to operate various performance devices, such as the display operation of the performance image in the display area of the image display device 5, the sound output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, the lighting operation of the decorative light-emitting elements such as the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LEDs, and the driving operation of the movable body 32. In addition, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. are made regarding the control contents of the performance operations using the various performance devices in accordance with the performance control commands, etc. transmitted from the main board 11.

Following the performance control process processing of step S76, a performance random number update processing is executed (step S77), and at least a portion of the performance random numbers used on the performance control board 12 side is updated by software. Then, the processing returns to step S73. Before returning to the processing of step S73, other processing may be executed.

Figure 10 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in step S76 of Figure 9 as the performance control process processing. In the performance control process processing shown in Figure 10, the performance control CPU 120 first executes a look-ahead preview setting process (step S161). In the look-ahead preview setting process, for example, judgments, decisions, settings, etc. for executing the look-ahead preview performance are made based on the performance control command at the time of the start winning transmitted from the main board 11. In addition, processing is executed to display the hold display based on the number of hold memories identified from the performance control command.

After executing the processing of step S161, the performance control CPU 120 selects and executes one of the processing of steps S170 to S175 as described below, depending on the value of a performance process flag provided in, for example, RAM 122.

The variable display start waiting process of step S170 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "0" (initial value). This variable display start waiting process includes a process of determining whether or not to start the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command specifying the start of variable display has been received from the main board 11. If it is determined that the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5 should be started, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "1" and the variable display start waiting process ends.

The variable display start setting process of step S171 is a process executed when the value of the performance process flag is "1". In this variable display start setting process, the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern (determined decorative pattern), the mode of the variable display of the decorative pattern, whether or not various performances such as reach performances and various advance notice performances are executed, and the mode and execution start timing are determined based on the display result and the change pattern specified by the performance control command. Then, a performance control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute a performance) that reflects the determined result is set. After that, based on the set performance control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "2", and the variable display start setting process is terminated. In response to the instruction to start the execution of the variable display of the decorative pattern, the display control unit 123 starts the variable display of the decorative pattern on the image display device 5.

The variable display performance process of step S172 is a process executed when the performance process flag is "2". In this variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display a performance image based on the performance control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5, to drive the movable body 32, to output voice and sound effects from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the voice control board 13, and to turn on/off/blink the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by outputting a command (illumination signal) to the lamp control board 14, thereby executing various performance controls during the variable display of the decorative pattern. After performing such performance control, for example, in response to the reading of an end code indicating the end of the variable display of the decorative pattern from the performance control pattern, or the reception of a command specifying the stop display of the fixed decorative pattern from the main board 11, the fixed decorative pattern, which is the display result of the decorative pattern, is stopped. When the final decorative pattern is displayed in a stopped state, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "3" and the performance process during variable display ends.

The special winning wait process of step S173 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "3". In this special winning wait process, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state has been received from the main board 11. Then, when a presentation control command designating the start of a jackpot game state is received, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to "4". Also, when a command designating the start of a jackpot game state is not received and the waiting time for receiving the command has elapsed, it is judged that the display result in the special winning game was a "miss", and the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value of "0". When the value of the presentation process flag is updated, the special winning wait process is terminated.

The jackpot performance process of step S174 is executed when the performance process flag value is "6". In this jackpot performance process, the performance control CPU 120 sets, for example, a performance control pattern corresponding to the performance content in the jackpot gaming state, and executes various performance controls in the jackpot gaming state based on the set content. In addition, in the jackpot performance process, for example, in response to receiving a command from the main board 11 specifying that the jackpot gaming state is to end, the value of the performance process flag is updated to "5", which is a value corresponding to the ending performance process, and the jackpot performance process ends.

The ending presentation process of step S175 is executed when the value of the presentation process flag is "7". In this ending presentation process, the presentation control CPU 120 sets a presentation control pattern corresponding to, for example, the end of a jackpot gaming state, and executes various presentation controls for the ending presentation at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. After that, the value of the presentation process flag is updated to the initial value "0", and the ending presentation process is terminated.

(Modification of the basic explanation)
This invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 described above is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of gaming media as prizes when a prize is won, but it may also be an enclosed type gaming machine that encloses gaming media and awards points when a prize is won.

Only one type of pattern (for example, a symbol showing "- ") may be displayed during the variable display of the special pattern, and the variable display may be achieved by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the pattern. Furthermore, even if the pattern is displayed during the variable display, the pattern may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (the display result may not include the symbol showing "- ").

In the above basic explanation, a pachinko gaming machine 1 was shown as the gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to slot machines (e.g., slot machines equipped with one or more of big bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, CZ (hereinafter, bonus, etc.)) that can play a game in which medals are inserted and a predetermined bet amount is set, multiple types of symbols are rotated in response to the player's operation of the control lever, and when the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button, a specific combination of symbols is formed, and a predetermined number of medals is paid out to the player.

The programs and data for implementing the present invention are not limited to being distributed or provided to the computer device included in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by a removable recording medium, but may be distributed by being pre-installed in a storage device of the computer device or the like. Furthermore, the programs and data for implementing the present invention may be distributed by being downloaded from another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communications processing unit.

The game can be executed not only by inserting a removable recording medium, but also by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory, or by directly executing the game using the hardware resources of another device on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with another computer device or the like via a network.

In this specification, expressions of comparison of various percentages such as the execution percentage of effects (such as "high", "low", "different", etc.) may include one being a "0%" percentage. For example, this also includes one being a "0%" percentage and the other being a "100%" percentage or a percentage less than "100%".

(Description of Characteristic Part 029SG in the Embodiment of the Present Invention)
Next, a characteristic feature 029SG according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described. The characteristic feature 029SG includes an invention 029SG and an invention 033SG.

The gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 029SG is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is favorable to a player,
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (for example, reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (for example, reach effect E) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance is announced (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach η, a portion in which a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance is executed from the execution of a reach performance A), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after it is announced that the advantageous state will not be reached as a performance result of the second suggestive performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a portion in which a reach performance E development announcement performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once announced as a performance result of a reach performance B);
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the third suggestion effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and then a reach effect F is executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development performance execution means, the fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the special development performance is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and the reach performance E is further executed).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance).
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state is shorter than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when it is notified that the control will be in the advantageous state (for example, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance F are set longer than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification effect to the end timing of reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period until it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, and when the special suggestion effect is executed after the execution of a special development effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect in an appropriate manner before it is announced that control will be entered into an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The duration of the second suggestion effect is longer than the duration of the first suggestion effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of the reach effect B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of the reach effect A).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the second suggestion effect can attract the player's attention for a longer period of time than the first suggestion effect, thereby increasing the interest in the game. Also, unlike the first suggestion effect, the second suggestion effect does not execute a development effect before the effect result is notified, so that even if a special development effect is not executed, the player can be sure to pay attention to whether or not the effect result of the second suggestion effect indicates that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means includes:
As the development suggestion effect, a special development suggestion effect suggesting the execution of the special development effect can be executed either during the execution period of the first suggestion effect or during the execution period of the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-7 and 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, and Super Reach η, a portion in which a meter effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect A and the execution of Reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, during the execution period of the first suggestion effect and during the execution period of the second suggestion effect, the special development suggestion effect can arouse the player's anticipation for the special development effect to be executed.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9 and FIG. 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at a second timing without going through the execution of the reach effect A or the reach effect B, and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, even if the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is not executed, the special development effect is executed, and the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not a highly anticipated special suggestion effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The period from when the special development effect is executed to when the special suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled is longer than the period from when the special development effect is executed to when the third suggestion effect is executed and it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set longer than the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect to the end timing of the reach effect F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by lengthening the period until notification when a highly anticipated special development effect is executed, it is possible to effectively increase the sense of expectation of being controlled in an advantageous state.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to fifth aspects,
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
The development suggestion performance execution means is capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a meter performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance, and a special development suggestion performance (e.g., a reach performance development suggestion performance) in which a performance mode changes stepwise to suggest the execution of the special development performance,
The rate at which the presentation mode changes to a specific number in the special development suggestion performance is higher than the rate at which the presentation mode changes to the specific number in the special development suggestion performance (for example, as shown in Figures 11-24 and 11-54, the meter performance changes the display mode of the meter 029SG005M in five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included), whereas the reach performance E development suggestion performance changes the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image in two stages).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the first suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed and the second suggestion effect in which a special development suggestion effect is executed, and since the special development suggestion effect is more likely to change to a specific stage number than the special development suggestion effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not it will change to a specific stage number, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

A seventh aspect of the gaming machine of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the sixth aspect,
The period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed is longer than the period during which the special development suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7 to FIG. 11-9, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach δ or the super reach ζ, the length L5 of the meter effect executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach effect E development suggestion effect executable period).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to suggest that the third suggestion performance, which has a higher expectation than the first suggestion performance, will be executed after the special development performance is executed for a longer period of time than the fourth suggestion performance will be executed after the execution of the special development performance is suggested, thereby increasing the interest in the special development suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of the invention 029SG in aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to aspect 6 or aspect 7,
When the second suggestion effect is executed, the development suggestion effect execution means does not execute the special development suggestion effect until the effect result of the second suggestion effect is notified (for example, the reach effect E development suggestion effect is a part that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the effect result of the reach effect B).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game from occurring due to the player perceiving that a special development suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect, thereby informing the player that the result of the second suggestion effect is that the player will not be controlled to an advantageous state.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
a favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a chance-up effect) that suggests that the result of the suggestion effect will be favorable to the player while the suggestion effect is being executed, the favorable result suggestion effect being executed based on the number of executions of constituent effects that make up the favorable result suggestion effect (e.g., a portion that executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31);
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed is greater than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of reach effect F, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S, pattern T, or pattern U), whereas during the execution of reach effect A, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P or pattern Q)).
The number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed is equal to or less than the number of times that the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is being executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-34, during the execution of reach effect E, a total of two effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern S and pattern Q), whereas during the execution of reach effect B, a total of three effects can be executed as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, namely, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 (the chance-up effect can be executed in pattern P, pattern Q, and pattern R)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a third suggestion effect is executed before the result of the first suggestion effect is announced, the number of times the constituent effects are executed is greater when the third suggestion effect is executed than when the first suggestion effect is executed, thereby making it possible to effectively draw the player's attention to the result of the third suggestion effect; and in the case where a special development effect is executed and then a fourth suggestion effect is executed after it is announced that the second suggestion effect will not be controlled to an advantageous state as a result, the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the fourth suggestion effect is executed is less than the number of times the constituent effects are executed when the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby preventing the player from paying excessive attention to the result of the fourth suggestion effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the ninth aspect,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing the advantageous result suggestion effect (e.g., chance up effect) in a plurality of modes including a common mode,
Even if the advantageous result suggestion effect of the common aspect is executed, the expectation degree differs depending on the type of the suggestion effect in which the advantageous result suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-12, the expectation degree of a jackpot differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent an increase in the number of advantageous result suggestion display patterns, while drawing the player's attention to which suggestion display is being executed during which of the common advantageous result suggestion display patterns is being executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 029SG in an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to the ninth or tenth aspect,
The suggestive performance execution means is capable of displaying an expectation level corresponding image corresponding to the expectation level of the suggestive performance when executing the suggestive performance, and is also capable of changing the expectation level corresponding image to a different expectation level corresponding image when the advantageous result suggestive performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-5, when the characters of a reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up performance, a display mode of an expectation level image showing the expectation level of a jackpot displayed together with the reach title image is changed (the number of stars displayed as the expectation level image is increased)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the image corresponding to the expectation level changes as the advantageous result suggestive effect is executed, so that it is possible to increase attention to the image corresponding to the expectation level, thereby enabling the player to accurately recognize the expectation level of the suggestive effect.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
a specific image suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a specific image suggestion effect (for example, an active display effect shown in modified example 029SG-1) which is an effect different from the suggestion effect and suggests that the advantageous state will be controlled by a display mode of a specific image (for example, an active display) displayed during the suggestion effect (for example, a part which displays an active display in one of a plurality of display modes in an active display area 029SG005F provided in a display area of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 11-57 as modified example 029SG-1, and varies the probability of winning depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in);
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a common specific image suggestion effect in common to all of the different types of suggestion effects as the specific image suggestion effect (for example, a portion in which an active display can be displayed in a white circle, a blue circle, or a red circle);
In the first development pattern, the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect executed before the special development effect is lower than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the execution of the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display of the variable display of the super reach η in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed and a reach effect F is further executed before a variable display result is notified as a result of the reach effect A, the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect A is lower than the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach effect F).
The rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the third suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the first development pattern is higher than the rate at which the common specific image suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the fourth suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-58 as modified example 029SG-1, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect F in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η is higher than the rate P1 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach effect E in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ζ in which a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach effect B, a reach effect E development notification effect is executed, and then the reach effect E is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect is executed and then the third suggestion effect is executed, the specific image suggestion effect is executed before the start of the special development effect, thereby reducing the risk that the player will be aware in advance that the third suggestion effect will be executed, and since the common specific image suggestion effect is executed appropriately between the third suggestion effect and the fourth suggestion effect according to the degree of expectation, interest in the game can be increased.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth aspect,
The specific image suggestion performance execution means is capable of changing the display mode of the specific image from a first mode (e.g., a white circle or a blue circle) to any one of a plurality of modes including a second mode (e.g., a red circle) having a higher expectation than the first mode;
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance is lower than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the development performance is executed (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-2, in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach η, a rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance F is set higher than a rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance A, and in a variable display in a fluctuation pattern of a super reach ζ, a rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance E is set higher than a rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of a reach performance B).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it easier for the player to recognize the degree of expectation that is controlled to an advantageous state by the display mode of the specific image, and reduces the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving the degree of expectation as high in advance because the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the development performance.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is the gaming machine according to the twelfth or thirteenth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing the special development effect as a third development pattern before the special suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect are not executed and the special suggestion effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, a part in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from a timing before the reach when the reach effect A and the reach effect B are not executed).
The rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion performance in the third development pattern is higher than the rate at which the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode after the special suggestion performance is executed in the third development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I is set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the display mode of the specific image changes to the second mode before the special suggestion effect is performed, making it easier for the player to recognize that the special suggestion effect will be executed.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect of the invention 029SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the twelfth to fourteenth aspects,
A gaming machine capable of performing variable display (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1),
A reserved memory means capable of storing information related to the variable display as reserved memory (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the start winning determination process shown in FIG. 11-14 );
A determination means (for example, a part where the CPU 103 executes the variable pattern setting process shown in FIG. 11-17) capable of determining that the development performance is executed when the variable display is started;
A determination means capable of determining that the development performance will be executed before the determination by the determination means with respect to the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory (for example, in the random number value determination process at the time of winning in variant example 029SG-4, when the CPU 103 determines that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a Super Reach, the determination means further determines which of the Super Reach fluctuation patterns from Super Reach α to Super Reach λ it is (a part which determines which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will be executed during the variable display);
Equipped with
The specific image suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing, as the specific image suggestion effect, an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed and an effect suggesting that the special development effect will be executed based on the determination result of the determination means (for example, in variant example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. are provided as the display form of the pending memory table display, and a part that can suggest which of reach effects E, F, G, H, and I the pending memory display will develop into depending on which shape is displayed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the specific image suggestion presentation before the variable display starts, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, the gaming machine of the first aspect of the invention 033SG is
A gaming machine that can be controlled to a favorable state for a player (for example, a jackpot gaming state),
a suggestion effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the variable display effect process shown in FIG. 10 ) capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion effects including a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (for example, reach effect C), a second suggestion effect (for example, reach effect D), and a special suggestion effect (for example, reach effect G) which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the advantageous state than the special suggestion effect;
a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the performance process during variable display shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a special development performance as a first development pattern before the performance result of the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, a portion where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ), and capable of executing a special development performance different from the special development performance as a second development pattern after the first suggestive performance or the second suggestive performance is executed and it is notified that the performance result will not be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a portion where a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ);
In the first development pattern, a predetermined performance execution means (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10) capable of executing a predetermined performance (for example, a premonition performance shown in FIG. 11-9) before the special development performance is executed;
Equipped with
The first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect have different expectations (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-30(C), the reach effect D has a higher expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect C),
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
When the first development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and the reach effect I is further executed).
When the second development pattern is executed by the development effect execution means, the special suggestion effect can be executed after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, and then the reach effect G development notification effect is executed, and the reach effect G is further executed).
When the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed, a specific suggestion effect different from the special suggestion effect and the special suggestion effect can be executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed, and then a reach effect H is executed).
When controlled to the advantageous state, the rate at which the special development effect is executed is higher than the rate at which the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, that is, when the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, the determination rate of the super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9) in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the variable display is higher than the determination rate of the super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7) in which a reach effect G development notification effect is executed during the variable display).
The performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set longer than the length L8 of the execution period of the reach performance G development notification performance),
The special development effects include a first effect (e.g., a blackout effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the visibility of the effect image is reduced, a second effect (e.g., an early effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the first effect and in which early information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary effect (e.g., a late effect shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) which is an effect executed after the second effect and in which late information with a higher degree of emphasis than the early information is visibly displayed,
The rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the first suggestion effect is different from the rate at which the special development effect is executed after the execution of the predetermined effect in the second suggestion effect (for example, as shown in Figures 11-30 (A) to 11-30 (C), the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect C is executed is higher than the rate at which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed after a premonition effect when a reach effect D is executed).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the presentation can be diversified by combining the types of suggestive presentation and the types of developing presentation, and a predetermined relationship can be given to the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation, thereby increasing the interest in the suggestive presentation and the developing presentation.

A gaming machine according to a second aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
A development pre-effect execution means is provided that can execute a development pre-effect before the special development effect or the specific development effect is executed (for example, a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the reach effect H development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach ι, and a portion in which a pre-effect is executed from a timing prior to the high expectation reach effect development notification effect in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach κ),
The development pre-effect execution means is capable of executing the development pre-effect common to the case where the special development effect is executed and the case where the specific development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-51, a part in which a pre-effect of a common mode is executed between the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pre-development performance is executed to increase attention to the development performance, while also drawing the player's attention to whether the development performance to be executed is a special development performance or a specific development performance, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the third aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the first or second aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
a development suggestion performance execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display performance process shown in FIG. 10 after the performance control CPU 120 determines to execute the branch destination suggestion performance in the branch destination performance determination process shown in FIG. 11-27 ) capable of executing a special development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Z displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the special development performance, a specific development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern Y displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y on the image display device 5) that suggests the execution of the specific development performance, and a common development suggestion performance (for example, a branch destination suggestion performance of pattern X displaying a branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X on the image display device 5);
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether a special development suggestion effect, a specific development suggestion effect, or a common development suggestion effect will be executed as the development suggestion effect, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the fourth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to third aspects,
The second difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern, is smaller than the first difference, which is the difference between the rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in 11-30(D), in the case of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is announced as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, Regarding the variation pattern and the variation pattern of the super reach θ in which the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as the reach performance C or the reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 60%, whereas the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ is 40%)
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, depending on whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether it is the first development pattern in which a special development effect is executed, or the second development pattern in which a special development effect is executed. Therefore, it becomes possible to draw attention to whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a fifth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth aspect,
The rate at which the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern and the rate at which the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern are the same or approximately the same (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision rate of reach performance C and the execution decision rate of reach performance D are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, it is possible to expect that the second development pattern will result in the special development effect being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the sixth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the fourth or fifth aspect,
The expectation level when the first suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern is the same or substantially the same as the expectation level when the second suggestive performance is executed in the second development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance C is determined and the jackpot expectation level when the execution of reach performance D is determined are the same).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, regardless of whether the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, when the special development effect is executed, it is possible to similarly expect that an advantageous state will be achieved, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the seventh aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixth aspects,
an advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) capable of executing a first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the development suggestion effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-6, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach κ, a portion that can determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach effect of the super reach to be executed is reach effect C and when it is reach effect D).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the development suggestion effect, which suggests the execution of a special development effect, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion that the development suggestion effect will be executed can be appropriately given, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the eighth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventh aspects,
an advantageous result suggestion effect execution means (for example, a part that executes the variable display during effect process shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute a chance-up effect in the chance-up effect determination process shown in FIG. 11-31) capable of executing a first advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the first suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the first suggestion effect is being executed, and a second advantageous result suggestion effect (for example, a branch destination suggestion effect) that suggests that the result of the second suggestion effect will be advantageous to the player while the second suggestion effect is being executed;
a development suggestion effect execution means capable of executing development suggestion effects (e.g., a meter effect, a reach effect E development suggestion effect, a reach effect G development suggestion effect) that suggest at least the execution of the special development effect (e.g., a part that executes the variable display during effect processing shown in FIG. 10 after the effect control CPU 120 determines the execution of a meter effect in the meter effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-23, determines the execution of a reach effect E development suggestion effect in the reach effect E development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-26, or determines the execution of a reach effect G development suggestion effect in the reach effect G development suggestion effect determination processing shown in FIG. 11-29);
Equipped with
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the first suggestion effect when the first suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern is different from the rate at which the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed during the execution of the second suggestion effect when the second suggestion effect is executed in the first development pattern (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modified example 029SG-13, in the case of a fluctuation pattern of a super reach κ in which a high expectation reach effect development notification effect and a reach effect I are executed before a variable display result (miss) is notified as a result of the effect of the reach effect C or the reach effect D, a part capable of determining whether or not to execute a chance-up effect at different rates when the execution of the reach effect C is determined and when the execution of the reach effect D is determined).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the execution rate of the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect, which suggest that the result of the presentation will be advantageous, differs between the first suggestion effect and the second suggestion effect, so that the suggestion of the presentation result can be made in an appropriate manner, thereby increasing interest in the game.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect of the invention 033SG is the gaming machine according to the seventh or eighth aspect,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The degree of relationship between the suggestion by the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect is that the specific development effect or the special development effect is executed after the execution of the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect, and the degree of relationship between the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect is higher than the relationship between the result of the suggestion effect executed after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern differ in the determination ratio according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, and the determination ratio does not differ according to the variable display result. In other words, the presence or absence of the execution of the branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern are determined according to whether or not the reach effect C or the reach effect D is executed and whether it develops into any of the reach effects G to I, and which of these reach effects G to I it develops into).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the suggestions given by the first special development effect and the second special development effect are closely related to the execution of a specific development effect or a special development effect close to the time of execution of the first special development effect or the second special development effect, so that the execution of the first special development effect and the second special development effect can increase attention to the specific development effect or the special development effect, thereby improving interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 10 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 9,
The development effect execution means is capable of executing a specific development effect different from the special development effect and the special development effect before the specific suggestion effect is executed when the special development effect is not executed after the predetermined effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ι, a reach effect H development notification effect is executed after the premonition effect is executed).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed differs before and after the execution of the specific development effect or the special development effect (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-12, the portion in which the probability of winning differs depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the operation of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by being able to preferably execute the first advantageous outcome suggestion display or the second advantageous outcome suggestion display, it is possible to increase attention as to whether the first or second development pattern will occur.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to tenth aspects,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
The rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed when the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z when the result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect are notified in the second notification mode, thereby giving the player a sense of surprise, and the process of deciding to execute the first advantageous outcome suggestive effect or the second advantageous outcome suggestive effect can be standardized between the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the first notification mode and the case where the result of the first suggestive effect or the second suggestive effect is notified in the second notification mode, thereby reducing the amount of data required for the process.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect of the invention 033SG is a gaming machine according to any one of the seventh to eleventh aspects,
The notification modes of the performance results in the first suggestion performance and the second suggestion performance include a first notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is simply notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-7, in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach γ, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and the variable display ends), and a second notification mode in which the fact that the performance will not be controlled to the advantageous state is notified once, and then the fact that the performance will be controlled to the advantageous state is notified (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-7, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) in which the variable display result is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance A to the reach performance D, and then the variable display result is once notified as a jackpot).
When the special development effect is executed after the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the first notification mode, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where it is notified that the advantageous state will be controlled in the suggestion effect executed after the special development effect is different from the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed in the case where the result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is notified in the second notification mode (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-8, reach effect C or reach effect D is executed, and this In the case where the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern (PB1-7) of the super reach θ jackpot), the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, when the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect is executed, the rate at which the first advantageous result suggestion effect or the second advantageous result suggestion effect is executed can be varied depending on whether or not a special development effect is executed before it is announced that the game will be controlled to an advantageous state, thereby increasing interest in the game.

The gaming machine of the invention 033SG in aspect 13 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 7 to 12,
The advantageous result suggestion effect execution means is capable of executing a plurality of advantageous result suggestion effects (e.g., branch destination suggestion effects of pattern X, pattern Y, and pattern Z) including the first advantageous result suggestion effect and the second advantageous result suggestion effect,
The execution rate of the special development effect differs depending on which of the advantageous result suggestion effects is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-28, the execution rate of the high expectation reach effect development notification effect differs depending on whether the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X, pattern Y, or pattern Z).
During the execution of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect, if the special development effect is not executed when the special advantageous result suggestion effect or the special suggestion effect with the highest execution rate of the special development effect is executed, the result of the effect notifying that the effect result of the first suggestion effect or the second suggestion effect being executed will be controlled to the advantageous state will be (for example, as shown in modified example 029SG-9, in the case where the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in effect pattern Z but the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed, or in the case where the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is not executed but the reach effect I is executed, the part that notifies that the variable display result will be a jackpot).
It is characterized by the following.
This feature can give the player a sense of surprise and can also make the player pay attention to whether or not a special development effect will be executed when a special advantageous result suggestion effect or a special suggestion effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Figure 11-1 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in this feature section 029SG. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes long, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 11-1 (A) is just one example, and other command formats may also be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals that make up the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 11-1(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbols in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set depending on the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss" or a "jackpot", and the result of the determination of which of several types of jackpot type should be used if the variable display result is a "jackpot", as shown in FIG. 11-1 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 11-1(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the pre-determined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determined result.

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game state. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game state. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the jackpot type determination result and the set EXT data may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening jackpot state and the high-speed opening jackpot state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the first start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the first start port. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted, for example, based on the second start condition being satisfied when the game ball passes (enters) the second start port. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Commands C4XXH and C6XXH are presentation control commands (commands specifying the judgment result at the time of winning) that indicate the content of the judgment result at the time of winning. Of these, command C4XXH is a design specification command that indicates whether the variable display result will be a "jackpot" or not and the type of jackpot (probable win or non-probable win) as the judgment result at the time of winning. Command C6XXH is a variable category command that indicates the judgment result at the time of winning, that is, whether the random number value for judging the fluctuation pattern will be a "non-reach", "super reach", or "other" fluctuation pattern.

The commands shown in FIG. 11-1(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 11-2 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 11-2, in this feature section 029SG, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the game effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called game random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count the numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count the numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 11-3 shows an example of the configuration of a special chart display result judgment table stored in ROM 101. In this feature section 029SG, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special symbol display result determination table is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special symbol that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special symbol game using a first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or a special symbol game using a second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature section 029SG, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table in this feature part 029SG, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this feature part 029SG) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this feature part 029SG). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Figure 11-4 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this feature section 029SG is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this feature section 029SG will be explained with reference to FIG. 11-4 (B). In this feature section 029SG, the jackpot types are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the jackpot game state ends, transitioning to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot C" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 2 times (so-called 2 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "Chance Special Jackpot A" may be referred to as a 10-round (10R) chance special jackpot, "Chance Special Jackpot B" may be referred to as a 5-round (5R) chance special jackpot, and "Chance Special Jackpot C" may be referred to as a 2-round (2R) chance special jackpot.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of a jackpot game state of a special jackpot A to a special jackpot C will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is one of the special jackpots A to C, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which jackpot game states occur consecutively without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special games (100 times in this feature part 029SG) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of a plurality of types based on the establishment of the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" to control to a jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to the high opening control accompanying the time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 11-5 shows the variation patterns in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", respectively, and for the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern that corresponds to the variable display result being "jackpot" is called the jackpot variation pattern.

There are two types of jackpot fluctuation patterns and reach fluctuation patterns: a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. Note that, although this feature section 029SG has one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more types of normal reach fluctuation patterns may be provided. Also, in this feature section 029SG, eleven types of fluctuation patterns are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns: Super reach α, Super reach β, Super reach γ, Super reach δ, Super reach ε, Super reach ζ, Super reach η, Super reach θ, Super reach ι, Super reach κ, and Super reach λ, but the present invention is not limited to this, and 12 or more types of super reach fluctuation patterns or only 10 or less types may be provided.

The Super Reach fluctuation patterns in this feature part 029SG are: Super Reach α fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-2) and a miss (PA2-2); Super Reach β fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-3) and a miss (PA2-3); Super Reach γ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-4) and a miss (PA2-4); Super Reach δ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-5); Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a miss (PA2-6); and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns in which the variable display result is a jackpot (PB1-5). There are provided a variation pattern (PA2-7) where the variable display result is a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-6) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach η and a variation pattern (PA2-8) where the variable display result is a miss, a variation pattern (PB1-7) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach θ and a variation pattern (PA2-9) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach ι and a variation pattern (PB1-8) where the variable display result is a miss, a variation pattern (PA2-11) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach κ and a variation pattern (PB1-9) where the variable display result is a miss, and a variation pattern (PA2-12) where the variable display result is a jackpot as a variation pattern for Super Reach λ.

As shown in Figure 11-5, the special chart change time of the normal reach change pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this feature part 029SG is executed is set shorter than that of the super reach change pattern.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, the variable display result is set in the order of super reach, normal reach, and non-reach so that the probability of a jackpot increasing. Therefore, with some exceptions, in the normal reach variation pattern and super reach variation pattern, the longer the special chart variation time, the higher the probability of a jackpot.

In particular, the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, the special chart change time of the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern, and the special chart change time of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the Super The special chart change time is set longer than the special chart change time of the reach ε change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ζ change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach η change pattern, the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach θ change pattern, and the special chart change time of the super reach κ change pattern is set longer than the special chart change time of the super reach ι change pattern.

In addition, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, there are no fluctuation patterns for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern that result in a jackpot. In other words, among these Super Reach α fluctuation pattern to Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, excluding the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to have the shortest special chart fluctuation time and the lowest jackpot expectation, and the longer the special chart fluctuation time, the higher the jackpot expectation.

Furthermore, in this feature part 029SG, a Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is provided as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern with a higher expectation of a jackpot than the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is exceptionally set to have a special chart fluctuation time longer than the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern and shorter than the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, as described below, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, a random number value for determining the type of fluctuation pattern may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may first be determined from these random number values for determining the type of fluctuation pattern, and then the fluctuation pattern belonging to the determined type may be determined.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (A), the super reach α variation pattern (PA2-2, PB1-2) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A with an execution period length of L1 is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance A. As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-7 (B), the super reach β variation pattern (PA2-3, PB1-3) is a variation pattern in which reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 (L2>L1) is executed as a reach performance of a super reach during variable display, and the variable display result is announced as the performance result of the reach performance B.

As shown in Figures 11-7 (A) and 11-7 (B), the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern are also fluctuation patterns that can execute a meter effect that suggests the execution of a high-expectation reach effect development notification effect from the variable display start timing to the reach effect end timing (variable display result notification timing). As mentioned above, since the length L2 of the execution period of reach effect B is set to be longer than the length L1 of the execution period of reach effect A, the length L5 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be longer than the length L4 of the meter effect execution period in the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern (L5>L4).

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-7 (C), the super reach γ variation pattern (PA2-4, PB1-4) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or reach performance D. The execution period of both reach performance C and reach performance D is set to length L3. In addition, the super reach γ variation pattern is also a variation pattern capable of executing a branch destination suggestion performance that suggests which of the following will be executed (which notification performance to branch to) during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D: a reach performance H development notification performance that notifies that a reach performance H will be executed after the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies that either reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-7 (D), the super reach δ variation pattern (PA2-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and then a reach performance E development suggestive performance suggesting development to a reach performance E can be executed (length of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period: L6a), and finally, it is a variation pattern that does not develop to a reach performance E and notifies of a miss. Note that the super reach δ variation pattern, like the super reach β variation pattern, is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance (length of the meter performance executable period: L5), and the length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestive performance executable period.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (E), the super reach ε variation pattern (PA2-6) is a variation pattern in which, during the variable display, reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and then a reach performance G development suggestion performance is executed, which suggests development to reach performance G, and finally notifies of a miss without developing to reach performance G. The super reach ε variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (F), the super reach ζ variation pattern (PA2-7, PB1-5) is a variation pattern in which a reach performance B with an execution period length of L2 is executed as a reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a reach performance E development suggestion performance is executed after notifying that the variable display result is a miss, and then a reach performance E development notification performance (length of execution period of reach performance E development notification performance: L6b) that notifies that it will develop into a reach performance E is executed, and then a reach performance E is executed. The super reach ζ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed (length of meter performance executable period: L5) from the start timing of the variable display to the end timing of the reach performance B. The length L5 of the meter performance executable period is set longer than the length L6a of the reach performance E development suggestion performance executable period. The length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance is set shorter than the length L5 of the meter performance executable period. In addition, the Super Reach ζ variation pattern has a period length from the start of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end of the reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result) set to L11.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-8 (G), the super reach η variation pattern (PA2-8, PB1-6) is a variation pattern in which reach performance A is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and a high expectation reach performance development notification performance that notifies the player that the reach performance A will develop into a reach performance with a high expectation of a jackpot (reach performance F or reach performance I described later in this characteristic part) is executed for a period of L7 (L7>L6b) that is longer than the length of the execution period L6b of the reach performance E development notification performance, and then a reach performance F is executed. The super reach η variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a meter performance can be executed from the start timing of the variable display to the timing when the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (the length of the meter performance execution period is L4', which is shorter than L4, because the reach performance A switches to the high expectation reach performance development notification performance halfway through). In addition, in the super reach η fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L12 (L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L11 from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E in the super reach ζ fluctuation pattern.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-8 (H), the super reach θ variation pattern (PA2-9, PB1-7) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D (the execution period of either reach performance is L3) is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during the variable display, and after notifying that the variable display result is a miss in these reach performances C or reach performance D, a reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed, and further, a reach performance G development notification performance that notifies that it will develop into reach performance G is executed for L8 (L7>L8), which is shorter than the execution period L7 of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and further the reach performance G is executed. The super reach θ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figure 11-5 and Figure 11-9 (I), the super reach ι variation pattern (PA2-10, PB1-8) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and then a reach performance H development notification performance is executed to notify that the performance will develop into reach performance H, thereby executing the reach performance H. The super reach ι variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

As shown in Figures 11-5 and 11-9 (J), the super reach κ variation pattern (PA2-11, PB1-9) is a variation pattern in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach during variable display, and a pre-performance and a precursor performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D halfway through reach performance C or reach performance D, and further a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with an execution period length of L7 is executed to execute reach performance I. The super reach κ variation pattern is also a variation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D. In addition, in the super reach κ fluctuation pattern, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), which is longer than the length of the period L12 from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of reach performance F in the super reach η fluctuation pattern.

The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (PA2-12, PB1-10) is a fluctuation pattern that executes a high expectation reach performance development notification performance with a duration of L7 from a timing before the reach in other Super Reach fluctuation patterns during variable display, and executes the reach performance I. The Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is also a fluctuation pattern that can execute a meter performance from the start timing of the variable display to the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance (since the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed from a timing before the reach, the duration of the meter performance execution period is L4'' which is even shorter than L4': L4>L4'>L4''). In addition, the length of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) of the Super Reach κ is set to L13 (L13>L12>L11), the same as the Super Reach κ.

In particular, as shown in Figures 11-10 (A) and 11-10 (B), the high expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature section 029SG includes a blackout performance in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5, an early performance in which the opening lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the blackout performance, a switching performance after the early performance, a late performance in which the closing lines are displayed on the image display device 5 after the switching performance, and a movable body performance in which the movable body 32 is dropped (operated) from an origin position above the image display device 5 to a performance position overlapping with approximately the center of the front of the display area of the image display device 5 after the late performance.

As shown in Figures 11-10(B) and 11-55, the first stage performance is a performance in which the lines spoken by the character displayed on the image display device 5 are displayed as a text image 029SG007 in the display area of the image display device 5 and are also output as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figures 11-10(B) and 11-55, the latter stage performance follows the former stage performance and displays the lines spoken by the character as a text image 029SG008 in the display area of the image display device 5, and also outputs them as audio information from the speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the opening line is "You're not alone...we'll show you everyone's power!", and the closing line is "Miracle attack!".

More specifically, the first stage performance is composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "You're not alone..." is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the seven letters of "You're not alone..." are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. Then, in the second period, the phrase "I'll show you everyone's power!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the 12 letters of "I'll show you everyone's power!" are displayed below the letters "You're not alone..." in the display area of image display device 5. The second stage performance is also composed of a first period and a second period, and in the first period, the phrase "Miracle" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the four letters of "Miracle" are displayed in the display area of image display device 5. During the second period, the line "Attack!" is output from speakers 8L and 8R, and the five letters of "Attack!" are displayed below the word "Miracle" in the display area of the image display device 5.

In other words, in the front and back performances of this feature part 029SG, the number of characters displayed in the first period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the first period of the back performance, and the number of characters displayed in the second period of the front performance is greater than the number of characters displayed in the second period of the back performance.

Also, as shown in FIG. 11-10 (B), the display manner of the lines in the early performance differs from the display manner of the lines in the late performance, and in particular, the lines in the late performance are displayed in a manner that is more emphasized than the display manner of the lines in the early performance.

For example, in the first stage performance, the background screen and character image of the image display device 5 are displayed in a dark manner, and a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "You're not alone...") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the first period, and then a text image 029SG007 consisting of multiple characters (e.g., "I'll show you all our power!") is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes larger and brighter (fade-in) during the second period. Also, after the text image 029SG007 (e.g., "You're not alone...I'll show you all our power!") is displayed at its largest and brightest, it is displayed in a manner that gradually becomes smaller and darker (fade-out) and finally disappears. Note that the text image 029SG007 may move while fading in or out.

On the other hand, in the latter stage performance, the background screen of the image display device 5 is displayed in a brighter manner than in the former stage performance, and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "Mi", "Ra", "Ku", "Ru") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in a manner that rotates and moves from the right side of the display screen toward the center in sequence during the first period (frame-in), and multiple character images 029SG008 consisting of one character (for example, "A", "Ta", "T", "Ku", "!") are displayed (dynamically displayed) in a manner that rotates and moves from the bottom side of the display screen toward the center during the second period (frame-in). Also, after these character images 029SG008 (for example, "Miracle Attack!") are displayed largest and brightest, they move radially outward and are finally displayed in a manner that disappears outside the display screen (frame-out).

As shown in Figure 11-10 (B), the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance is small, flat (two-dimensional), moves slowly (the speed at which the display mode changes due to fade-in), and is displayed at a low brightness. On the other hand, the character image 029SG008 in the second stage performance is larger, three-dimensional (three-dimensional), moves faster (the speed at which the display mode changes due to frame-in (movement speed)), and is displayed at a high brightness than the character image 029SG007 in the first stage performance (see Figure 11-55).

In addition, as long as the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG008 in the latter performance is larger and brighter than the maximum size and brightness of the character image 029SG007 in the former performance, the size and brightness of a portion of the character image when fading in or framing in may be inversely related. Also, although the content of the dialogue differs between the former and latter performances, at least some of the content may be the same.

In this way, it can be said that the larger the size of the character images that make up the dialogue, the higher the degree of emphasis; the more three-dimensional the form is than the more planar, the higher the degree of emphasis is for faster movement than slower, and the higher the brightness is than the lower the degree of emphasis is. Note that in the above, the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images are exemplified in the latter stage performance as being more emphasized than in the former stage performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is sufficient that the degree of emphasis of at least one element of the size, form, movement, and brightness of the character images in the latter stage performance is higher than that of the character images in the former stage performance. In addition to the above, for example, the degree of emphasis may include a higher degree for thicker characters than for thin characters, and a higher degree for colors than for low saturation or brightness. Furthermore, the degree of emphasis may be increased not only by the display mode of the character images themselves, but also by displaying special images such as effect images around the character images.

Figure 11-6 is an explanatory diagram of how the variation pattern is determined in this feature part 029SG. In this feature part 029SG, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the display result of the variable display to be executed and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-6, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-5 (super reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-6 (super reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-7 (super reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (super reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (super reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-10 (super reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table.

When using the jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table to determine the fluctuation pattern, the determination ratio of PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach jackpot) is set to the lowest, followed by PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-5 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-6 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-7 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-8 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-9 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-10 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-11 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-12 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-13 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β jackpot), PB1-14 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ jackpot), PB1-15 (fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ jackpot), PB1-16 (fluctuation pattern of super reach η jackpot), PB1-17 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-18 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-19 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-20 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-21 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-22 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-23 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-24 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α jackpot), PB1-25 (fluctuation The determination rate can be set to increase in the following order: PB1-1 (Pear Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-8 (Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-9 (Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-10 (Super Reach λ jackpot fluctuation pattern) (Determination rate of each Super Reach fluctuation pattern when selecting the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table: PB1-2<PB1-3<PB1-4<PB1-5<PB1-6<PB1-7<PB1-8<PB1-9<PB1-10).

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the same jackpot variation pattern determination table is used to determine the variation pattern regardless of the type of jackpot, but the present invention is not limited to this. It is also possible to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for any of PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3, and to provide multiple jackpot variation pattern determination tables with different determination rates for at least two or more jackpot variation patterns, and to determine the variation pattern using different jackpot variation pattern determination tables depending on the type of jackpot. In this way, it is possible to create a variation pattern that is easily determined for each type of jackpot, so that the player can pay attention to which variable display pattern has resulted in the variable display result being a jackpot, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A as PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B as PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C as PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss), PA2-4 (fluctuation pattern of super reach γ miss), It is determined from the following: PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In addition, when the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D as PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), It is determined from PA2-5 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ miss), PA2-6 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ε miss), PA2-7 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ζ miss), PA2-8 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach η miss), PA2-9 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ miss), PA2-10 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach ι miss), PA2-11 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ miss), and PA2-12 (fluctuation pattern of Super Reach λ miss).

In other words, if the variable display result in this feature part 029SG is a "miss," the percentage of variable display being executed using a shortening variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3, PA1-4) in which the special chart fluctuation time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1) based on the number of reserved memories of the variable chart being 3 or 4, or the time-saving state, is high, making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

When determining the fluctuation pattern using miss fluctuation pattern determination tables A to D, the determination ratio of non-reach miss fluctuation patterns (PA1-1 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table A, PA1-2 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table B, PA1-3 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table C, and PA1-4 for miss fluctuation pattern determination table D) is set highest, followed by PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-5 (super reach δ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-6 (super reach 7 miss fluctuation pattern), and (Super reach ε miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-7 (Super reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-8 (Super reach η miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-9 (Super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-10 (Super reach ι miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-11 (Super reach κ miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-12 (Super reach λ miss fluctuation pattern) should be set to decrease in order (Decision ratio of each super reach fluctuation pattern when the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table is selected: PA2-12<PA2-11<PA2-10<PA2-9<PA2-8<PA2-7<PA2-6<PA2-5<PA2-4<PA2-3<PA2-2).

By setting the determination ratio of each fluctuation pattern in each fluctuation pattern judgment table as described above, for the Super Reach fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern is set to the lowest, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach α fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach β fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern is set to be higher than the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation rate of the Super Reach The jackpot expectation of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ζ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach η fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, and the jackpot expectation of the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern is set higher than that of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. As for the Super Reach δ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach ε fluctuation pattern, as mentioned above, only the fluctuation patterns in the case where the variable display result is a miss are provided, so the jackpot expectation is 0.

Next, the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG will be described. In the display area of the image display device 5, the effect pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of "left", "middle", and "right" are arranged. In addition, a first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and a second reserved memory display area 029SG005U are set in two places on the left and right of the lower part of the display area of the image display device 5. In the first reserved memory display area 029SG005D and the second reserved memory display area 029SG005U, a reserved memory display that identifiably displays the reserved memory number (special reserved memory number) of the variable display corresponding to the special game is displayed. In this characteristic part 029SG, these reserved displays can be displayed in multiple display modes, and a pre-reading notice display (also called a reserved display notice display) that changes the rate at which the reserved memory display is displayed in the variable display corresponding to the reserved memory display (the probability of a jackpot) can be executed.

Furthermore, on the right side of the image display device 5 in this characteristic part 029SG, a meter 029SG005M is displayed, which can change the display mode to five levels (six levels if the state where the meter performance is not executed is included) as the meter performance described above.

The RAM 102 in this characteristic section 029SG is provided with a game control data holding area 029SG150 as shown in FIG. 11-12, for example, as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area 029SG150 shown in FIG. 11-12 includes a first special chart reserve memory section 029SG151A, a second special chart reserve memory section 029SG151B, a normal chart reserve memory section 029SG151C, a game control flag setting section 029SG152, a game control timer setting section 029SG153, a game control counter setting section 029SG154, and a game control buffer setting section 029SG155.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A stores reservation data for a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) that has not yet started, but in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151A associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the first special chart is reserved, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit 029SG151B associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and the random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B thus indicates that the execution of a special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C stores reserve information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit 029SG151C associates the game balls with reserve numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit 029SG152 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 stores data indicating the value of the flag and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit 029SG153 is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit 029SG153 stores data indicating the timer values of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit 029SG154 is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 stores data indicating the buffer values in each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in Figure 3 is provided with a performance control data holding area 029SG190 as shown in Figure 11-13(A) as an area for holding various data used to control performance operations. The performance control data holding area 029SG190 shown in Figure 11-13(A) includes a performance control flag setting unit 029SG191, a performance control timer setting unit 029SG192, a performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and a performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194.

The performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to the performance operation state, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and the performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit 029SG191 stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit 029SG192 stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193 stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit 029SG194 stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this feature section 029SG, data constituting the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A as shown in FIG. 11-13 (B) is stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section 029SG194. The start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "1-1" to "1-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the first special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "1-0") corresponding to the first special symbol being displayed variably. In addition, the start winning time receiving command buffer 029SG194A has a storage area (area corresponding to buffer numbers "2-1" to "2-4") corresponding to the maximum value of the total reserved memory number of the second special symbol reserved memory (for example, "4") and a storage area (area corresponding to buffer number "2-0") corresponding to the second special symbol being displayed variably. When a start win occurs at the first start win port or the second start win port, a set of four commands, namely, a start win designation command (first start win designation command or second start win designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), is sent from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The storage area corresponding to the first special pattern reserved memory and the storage area corresponding to the second special pattern reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A are provided with storage areas (entries) for storing these start win designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command separately in the first special pattern reserved memory and the second special pattern reserved memory.

The contents of these storage areas (entries) are shifted up one at a time when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1" or buffer number "2-1") begins, as described below, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" or buffer number "2-0", which stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met, are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process that is executed when the variable display ends.

Furthermore, in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A of this characteristic part 029SG, a memory area is reserved for each storage area (entry) so that the hold display flag, which is set to a flag value corresponding to the display pattern (display mode) of the start opening winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the hold memory display, depending on whether or not the display pattern associated with the decision on whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance in the pre-reading preview setting process (Figure 11-20) is undetermined, that is, depending on the occurrence of a new start winning, can be stored in association with each buffer number corresponding to the first special chart hold memory and the second special chart hold memory.

When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is not determined in the pre-reading notice setting process described later, the hold display flag is set to "0", which corresponds to the display pattern of the normal hold memory display, and the hold memory display in the normal display mode (e.g., a white circle) is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U provided at the bottom of the image display device 5. When the execution of the pre-reading notice performance is determined, the hold display flag is set to "1" (blue circle) or "2" (red circle), which corresponds to the display pattern of the hold memory display in a special mode (e.g., a blue circle or a red circle) different from the normal display mode, and the hold memory display in a special mode different from the normal display mode is displayed in the first hold memory display area 029SG5D and the second hold memory display area 029SG5U, and the variable display corresponding to the hold memory display is set to notify the possibility of a jackpot or a super reach.

When a start win is made to the first start win port, the performance control CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A, and when a start win is made to the second start win port, the CPU 120 stores the command from the top (the entry with the lowest buffer number) of the free entry corresponding to the second special symbol reserved memory in the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A. When a start win is made, the start win port designation command to the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start win port designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage area corresponding to the last "1" to "4" of the buffer number corresponding to the first special symbol reserved memory or the second special symbol reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern is started, the commands stored in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A shown in FIG. 11-13(B) are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents stored in the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents stored in the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory is ended in the storage state shown in FIG. 11-13(B), the commands stored in buffer number "0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1" are shifted to buffer number "0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "3" and "4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "2" and "3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

Next, the start winning judgment process of this feature part 029SG executed in step S101 of Fig. 6 will be described based on Fig. 11-14. In the start winning judgment process, the CPU 103 first judges whether the first start hole switch 22A, which is provided corresponding to the first start winning hole formed by the winning ball device 6A, is in the ON state based on the detection signal from the first start hole switch 22A (step 029SGS101a). At this time, if the first start hole switch 22A is in the ON state (step 029SGS101a; Y), it judges whether the first special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the first special symbol, is a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS102). The CPU 103 can specify the first reserved memory number by, for example, reading the first reserved memory number count value, which is the stored value of the first reserved memory number counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the first reserved memory number is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "1" (step 029SGS103).

When the first start port switch 22A is off in step 029SGS101a (step 029SGS101a; N) or when the first special symbol reserved memory number has reached the upper limit in step 029SGS102 (step 029SGS102; Y), the second start port switch 22B is determined to be on or not based on a detection signal from the second start port switch 22B provided corresponding to the second start port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B (step 029SGS101b). At this time, if the second start port switch 22B is on (step 029SGS101b; Y), it is determined whether the second special symbol reserved memory number, which is the reserved memory number of the special symbol game using the second special symbol, has reached a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4" as the upper limit memory number) (step 029SGS105). The CPU 103 can specify the number of reserved second special figures by, for example, reading the second reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the second reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154. When the second reserved memory count is not the upper limit value in step 029SGS105 (step 029SGS105; N), for example, the storage value of the start port buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 is set to "2" (step 029SGS106).

After executing either the process of step 029SGS103 or step 029SGS106, the number of reserved memories corresponding to the start port buffer value, which is the stored value of the start port buffer, is updated to add 1 (step 029SGS107). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the first reserved memory count value is added by 1, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the second reserved memory count value is added by 1. Thus, the first reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the first start winning port and the first start condition corresponding to the special game using the first special game is established. In addition, the second reserved memory count value is updated to increase by 1 when the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning port and the second start condition corresponding to the special game using the second special game is established. At this time, the total reserved memory number is also updated to add 1 (step 029SGS108). For example, the total reserved memory count value, which is the stored value of the total reserved memory count counter provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, can be updated to add 1.

After executing the process of step 029SGS108, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern from the numerical data updated by the random number circuit 104 and the random counter of the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 (step 029SGS109). The numerical data indicating each random number value thus extracted is stored by being set as reserved information at the beginning of an empty entry in the special chart reserved memory unit according to the start port buffer value (step 029SGS110). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151A, while when the start port buffer value is "2", the numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 are stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit 029SG151B.

The numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result and the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot are used to determine whether the variable display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is a "jackpot" or not, and further to determine the type of jackpot if the variable display result is a "jackpot". The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is used to determine the variation pattern including the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol. By executing the processing of step 029SGS109, the CPU 103 extracts numerical data indicating all of the random number values used to determine the variable display mode including the variable display result and the variable display time of the special symbol or decorative symbol.

Following the processing of step 029SGS110, the sending setting of the start port winning designation command according to the start port buffer value is performed (step 029SGS111). For example, when the start port buffer value is "1", the storage address of the first start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the first start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the start port buffer value is "2", the storage address of the second start port winning designation command table in ROM 101 is stored in the buffer area of the transmission command buffer, and the setting is performed to send the second start port winning designation command to the performance control board 12. The start port winning designation command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example, after the special pattern process processing is completed, by executing the command control processing of step S27 shown in FIG. 5.

Following the processing of step 029SGS111, a random number value determination process is executed at the time of winning (step 029SGS112). After that, a setting is made to send a pending memory number notification command to the performance control board 12, for example by storing the storage address of the pending memory number notification command table in ROM 101 in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer (step 029SGS113). The pending memory number notification command thus set is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12, for example by executing the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 after the special symbol process process is completed.

After executing the process of step 029SGS113, it is determined whether the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114). At this time, if the start port buffer value is "1" (step 029SGS114; Y), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS115), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS104. On the other hand, if the start port buffer value is "2" (step 029SGS114; N), the start port buffer is cleared and its stored value is initialized to "0" (step 029SGS116), and the start winning process is terminated. As a result, even if both the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B simultaneously detect the start winning of a valid game ball, the process based on the detection of both valid start winnings can be completed reliably.

Figure 11-15 (A) is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step 029SGS112 in Figure 11-14 as a winning random number value determination process. In this feature section 029SG, when the variable display of special symbols and decorative symbols is started, a determination is made by the normal special symbol process (step S22 in Figure 6, Figure 11-16) described below as to whether or not to control the special symbol display result (variable display result of special symbols) to a "jackpot" and to control the game to a jackpot. Also, in the variable pattern setting process (step S23 in Figure 6, Figure 11-17) described below, a determination is made of a variable pattern that specifically specifies the variable display mode of the decorative symbols. On the other hand, apart from these judgments, when the game ball is detected in the start winning hole (first start winning hole or second start winning hole), the CPU 103 executes the winning random number judgment process of step 029SGS112 to judge whether or not it is judged that the jackpot pattern is to be stopped and displayed as the special symbol display result, and judge whether or not the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is a predetermined display mode accompanied by a super reach. As a result, before the variable display of the special symbol or the decorative symbol based on the detection of the game ball that entered the start winning hole is started, that is, before it is decided whether or not it is a jackpot at the start of the variable display, it is judged that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and which category of variable display mode the variable display mode of the decorative symbol will be, and based on this judgment result, the performance control CPU 120 or the like executes a notice performance such as a pre-reading notice performance, as described later.

In the winning random number determination process shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the CPU 103 first identifies the current game state of the pachinko game machine 1 by, for example, checking the state of the time-saving flag and the special probability flag provided in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS121). The CPU 103 identifies the special probability state when the special probability flag is on, identifies the time-saving state when the special probability flag is off and the time-saving flag is on, and identifies the normal state when both the special probability flag and the time-saving flag are off.

Following the processing of step 029SGS121, the display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set (step 029SGS122). After that, it is judged whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result extracted in step 029SGS109 of FIG. 11-14 is within a predetermined jackpot judgment range (step 029SGS123). In the jackpot judgment range, individual judgment values assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected by the processing of step 029SGS122 are set, and the CPU 103 can compare the random number value MR1 with each judgment value one by one to judge whether there is a judgment value that matches the random number value MR1. Alternatively, numerical values indicating the minimum (lower limit) and maximum (upper limit) judgment values included in the jackpot judgment range may be set, and the CPU 103 may compare the random number value MR1 with the minimum and maximum values of the jackpot judgment range to determine whether the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range. In this case, by determining that the random number value MR1 is within the jackpot judgment range, it can be determined that the variable display result based on the reserved data including the random number value MR1 is determined to be a "jackpot".

If it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the winning combination is not within the winning combination range, that is, if it is determined that the winning combination is not a winning combination in the variable display (step 029SGS123; N), that is, if the variable display result in the variable display is a "miss", the transmission setting of the first pattern designation command, which is a pattern designation command corresponding to the variable display result being a "miss" (step 029SGS128), is executed, and it is determined whether the time-saving flag is on or not, that is, whether the current game state is in the time-saving state or not (step 029SGS129). If the time-saving flag is off (step 029SGS129; N), the losing combination pattern determination table A is selected and set, and if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS129; Y), the losing combination pattern determination table D is selected and set (step 029SGS131). In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table A is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the number of reserved memories is two or less. In addition, the loss fluctuation pattern determination table D is a loss fluctuation pattern determination table used when the game state is a high base state in which time-saving control is being executed.

Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS123 that the value is within the jackpot determination range, that is, if it is determined that a jackpot will occur during variable display (step 029SGS123; Y), as shown in FIG. 11-15(A), the jackpot type is determined based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination (step 029SGS132). At this time, the CPU 103 selects table data for jackpot type determination from the table data constituting the jackpot type determination table according to the variable special chart (the "first special chart" corresponding to "1" or the "second special chart" corresponding to "2") specified in response to the start port buffer value. Then, by referring to the selected table data for jackpot type determination, it is determined which of the multiple types the jackpot type is determined to be.

In addition, the sending setting of the symbol designation command according to the type of jackpot determined is executed (step 029SGS133), i.e., the second symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot A, the third symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot B, the fourth symbol designation command in case of a sure jackpot C, and the fifth symbol designation command in case of a non-variable jackpot, and the jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected and set (step 029SGS135), and the process proceeds to step 029SGS138.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS130, step 029SGS131, and step 029SGS135, the variable category according to the range of judgment values that includes the random number value MR3 is determined using each of the variable pattern judgment tables set in each of these steps and the numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for variable pattern judgment (step 029SGS138). In this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-15(B), at least when the variable display result is "miss", a variable category that is a variable display mode of "non-reach" in common regardless of the total reserved memory number, a variable category that is a variable display mode of "super reach", and a variable category of "other" that is a variable display mode other than "non-reach" and "super reach" (for example, normal reach) are provided, and it is sufficient to determine whether such a variable category is determined based on the random number value MR3.

After that, a variable category designation command according to the result of the processing in step 029SGS138 is set up to be sent to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS139), and the winning random number value determination process is terminated.

Figure 11-16 is a flow chart showing an example of the processing executed in S110 of Figure 6 as the normal special symbol processing. In the normal special symbol processing shown in Figure 11-16, the CPU 103 first judges whether the second special symbol reserved memory count is "0" or not (step 029SGS141). The second special symbol reserved memory count is the reserved memory count of the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. For example, in the processing of step 029SGS141, the second reserved memory count value stored in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 may be read, and it may be judged whether the read value is "0" or not.

When the second special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; N), the reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS142). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS142, the second special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the second special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the second special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the second special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry at a time (step 029SGS143).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "2" (step 029SGS144), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

On the other hand, when the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0" in step 029SGS141 (step 029SGS141; Y), it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0" (step 029SGS145). The first special pattern reserved memory number is the reserved memory number of the special pattern game using the first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A. For example, in the process of step 029SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 029SG154 reads the first reserved memory number count value stored in the first reserved memory number counter and determines whether the read value is "0". In this way, the process of step 029SGS145 is executed when it is determined in step 029SGS141 that the second special pattern reserved memory number is "0", and it is determined whether the first special pattern reserved memory number is "0". As a result, the special pattern game using the second special pattern is started in priority to the special pattern game using the first special pattern.

The special chart game using the second special chart is not limited to being executed with priority over the special chart game using the first special chart, and may be started in the order in which the game ball enters (passes) the first start winning port or the second start winning port and the start winning occurs. In this case, a table may be provided that stores data that can identify the order in which the start winning occurs, and it may be possible to determine whether to start the special chart game using the first special chart or the second special chart from the stored data.

When the first special chart reserved memory number is other than "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; N), the reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory section corresponding to reserved number "1" is read out as numerical data indicating a random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the type of big win, and a random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS146). The numerical data read out at this time may be temporarily stored, for example, in a fluctuation random number buffer.

Following the processing of step 029SGS146, the first special chart reserved memory count value and the total reserved memory count value are updated by subtracting 1 from each other, and the first special chart reserved memory count and the total reserved memory count are updated, and the data in the first special chart reserved memory section is updated. Specifically, the reserved data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in entries lower than reserved number "1" in the first special chart reserved memory section (for example, entries corresponding to reserved numbers "2" to "4") are shifted to higher entries by one entry (step 029SGS147).

After that, the variable special chart designation buffer value, which is the stored value in the variable special chart designation buffer, is updated to "1" (step 029SGS148), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS149.

In step 029SGS149, the special pattern display result judgment table shown in FIG. 11-3 is selected and set as a table to be used for determining whether the special pattern display result, which is the variable display result of the special pattern, is a "jackpot" or a "miss". Next, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment stored in the variable random number buffer is compared with the judgment value assigned to each special pattern display result of "jackpot" or "miss" to determine whether the special pattern display result is a "jackpot" or a "miss" (step 029SGS150a). In addition, in this step 029SGS150a, if the game state at that time is a high probability state (high probability state) in which the high probability flag is on, if the random number value MR1 for special pattern display result judgment falls within the range of 10000 to 12180 corresponding to the high probability state (high probability state), it is judged as a "jackpot", and if it does not fall within the range, it is judged as a "miss". Also, if the probability is low and the probability flag is off, if the random number value MR1 used to determine the special chart display result falls within the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "jackpot," and if it does not fall within the range, it is determined to be a "miss."

In this way, in the special chart display result judgment table 1 selected in step 029SGS149, different judgment values are assigned to "jackpot" depending on the game state at that time (high probability, low probability), so in the processing of step 029SGS150a, whether or not the special chart display result is a "jackpot" is determined using different judgment data (judgment values) depending on whether or not the game state when the variable display of the special chart game or the like is started is a high probability state, so that when the game state is a high probability state, it is judged (determined) to be a "jackpot" with a higher probability than when it is a low probability state.

When it is determined in step 029SGS150a that it is a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; Y), the jackpot flag is set to ON in the game control flag setting unit 029SG152 (step 029SGS152). At this time, the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 11-4 (A) is selected and set as the table to be used for determining the jackpot type as one of the multiple types (step 029SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table thus set, the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types according to whether the numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the variable random number buffer matches with the determination value assigned to each jackpot type of "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", or "variable jackpot C" in the jackpot type determination table (step 029SGS154).

By determining the jackpot type in the process of step 029SGS154, it is determined before the derivation of the fixed special pattern as the variable display result whether the game state after the end of the jackpot game state is controlled to a time-saving state or a high probability state, which is more advantageous to the player than the time-saving state. In response to the jackpot type thus determined, the determined jackpot type is stored by setting, for example, a jackpot type buffer value, which is a stored value of the jackpot type buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 (step 029SGS155). As an example, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot" corresponding to a non-high probability jackpot, the jackpot type buffer value is set to "0", if it is a "high probability A" corresponding to a high probability jackpot A, it is set to "1", if it is a "high probability B" corresponding to a high probability jackpot B, it is set to "2", and if it is a "high probability C" corresponding to a high probability jackpot C, it is set to "3".

After step 029SGS155 is completed, or if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the game is not a "jackpot" (step 029SGS150a; N), a fixed special symbol is set in accordance with the pre-determined result of whether or not to control the game to a jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the on state) and the determined jackpot type in the case of a jackpot game state. As an example, in accordance with the pre-determined result of the special symbol display result being a "miss," a special symbol showing the "-" symbol, which is a miss symbol, is set as the fixed special symbol. Also, if it is determined in step 029SGS150a that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot," if the jackpot type in step 029SGS154 is "high probability jackpot A," a special symbol showing the number "7" is set as the fixed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot B," a special symbol showing the number "5" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "non-high probability jackpot," a special symbol showing the number "3" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Furthermore, if the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C," a special symbol showing the number "1" is set as the confirmed special symbol. Note that these confirmed special symbols are merely examples, and other confirmed special symbols may be set, or multiple types of symbols may be set as confirmed special symbols.

After the confirmed special symbol is set in step 029SGS156, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "1", which corresponds to the variable pattern setting process (step 029SGS157), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated.

If the reserved memory count for the special symbol game using the first special symbol is "0" in step 029SGS145 (step 029SGS145; Y), a predetermined demo display setting is performed (step 029SGS158), and then the normal special symbol processing is terminated. In this demo display setting, it is determined whether or not a performance control command (customer waiting demo designation command) that designates a demonstration display (demo screen display) by, for example, displaying a predetermined performance image on the image display device 5 has been transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demo designation command has already been transmitted, the demo display setting is terminated as is. On the other hand, if it has not been transmitted, settings are performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designation command, and then the demo display setting is terminated.

Figure 11-17 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S111 of Figure 6 as the fluctuation pattern setting process. In the fluctuation pattern setting process shown in Figure 11-17, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161). Then, if the jackpot flag is set to the ON state (step 029SGS161; Y), the CPU 103 selects and sets the fluctuation pattern determination table for the jackpot (step 029SGS164).

If the judgment in step 029SGS161 does not indicate that the jackpot flag is on (step 029SGS161; N), the game control flag setting unit judges whether the time-saving flag is on to judge whether the game state is in a special state or a time-saving state and time-saving control is being performed (step 029SGS168). Then, if the time-saving flag is on (step 029SGS168; Y), the loss fluctuation pattern judgment table D is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS169).

On the other hand, when time-saving control is not in progress, that is, when the time-saving flag is not on (step 029SGS168; N), the number of reserved memories of variable special charts is identified, for example by reading the stored value of the reserved memory number counter for variable special charts provided in the game control counter setting unit 029SG154, and it is determined whether the reserved memory number of the identified variable special chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 1 or 2 (step 029SGS170; N), the loss variable pattern determination table A is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS171).

In addition, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 1 or 2 (step 029 SGS170; N), it is further determined whether the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 3 (step 029 SGS172).

If the number of reserved memories for the identified special variable chart is 3 (step 029SGS172; Y), the loss variable pattern determination table B is selected and set as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable patterns (step 029SGS173).

Also, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is not 3, that is, if the number of reserved memories for the identified variable special chart is 4 (step 029SGS172; N), the system selects and sets the miss variable pattern determination table C as the table to be used for determining one of multiple types of variable pattern (step 029SGS174), and proceeds to step 029SGS175.

After executing any of the processes of step 029SGS164, step 029SGS169, step 029SGS171, step 029SGS173, and step 029SGS174, the fluctuation pattern is determined to be one of several types by referring to the selected (set) jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table, special win fluctuation pattern determination table, or miss fluctuation pattern determination table A to D based on, for example, numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer (step 029SGS175).

When the jackpot flag is off, step 029SGS175 determines the variation pattern, and determines whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to "reach." In other words, step 029SGS170 includes a process for determining whether the variable display state of the decorative symbols is set to a "reach" state when the variable display result is a "miss."

After the variation pattern is determined in step 029SGS175, settings are made to start the variation of the special patterns so that either a special pattern game using the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B is started according to the variable special pattern designation buffer value (step 029SGS176). As an example, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "1", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the first special pattern on the first special pattern display device 4A. On the other hand, if the variable special pattern designation buffer value is "2", settings are made to send a drive signal to update the display of the second special pattern on the second special pattern display device 4B.

Following the processing of step 029SGS176, settings are made to send various commands for when the special pattern starts to change (step 029SGS177). For example, when the special pattern change designation buffer value is "1", the CPU 103 stores the setting data indicating the storage address (first address) in the ROM 101 of the first change start command table prepared in advance in the buffer area designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 in order to sequentially send the game state designation command, the first variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the variable display result designation command, and the first reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. On the other hand, when the variable special chart designation buffer value is "2", the CPU 103 stores setting data indicating the storage address in ROM 101 of the second variable start command table prepared in advance in a buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit 029SG155 in order to sequentially transmit the game state designation command, second variable display start command, variable pattern designation command, variable display result designation command, and second reserved memory number notification command from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12.

After executing the process of step 029SGS177, the special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol according to the result of the determination of the fluctuation pattern, is set (step 029SGS178). The special symbol fluctuation time, which is the variable display time of the special symbol, is the time required from the start of the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game until the confirmed special symbol, which is the variable display result (special symbol display result), is displayed stationary. After that, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "2", which is the value corresponding to the special symbol fluctuation process (step 029SGS179), and the fluctuation pattern setting process is terminated.

Based on the command transmission setting in step 029SGS177, each time the command control process of step S27 shown in FIG. 5 is executed after the variable pattern setting process is completed, the main board 11 will sequentially transmit a game state designation command, a first variable display start command or a second variable display start command, a variable pattern designation command, a variable display result designation command, a first reserved memory number notification command or a second reserved memory number notification command to the presentation control board 12. The order in which these presentation control commands are transmitted can be changed arbitrarily, and for example, the variable display result designation command may be transmitted first, followed by the first variable display start command or the second variable display start command, the variable pattern designation command, the game state designation command, the first reserved memory number notification command or the second reserved memory number notification command.

Figure 11-18 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S113 of Figure 6 as the special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 turns on the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process in step S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and controls the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to stop displaying the stopped symbol (step 029SGS180). If the change special symbol designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special symbol, the change of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 4A is ended, and if the change special symbol designation buffer value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display device 4B is ended. In addition, the CPU 103 controls to send a symbol determination command to the performance control board 12 (step 029SGS181).

Then, it is determined whether the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182). If the jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS182; Y), the CPU 103 clears the probability variable flag and the time-saving flag to turn them off (step 029SGS184) if they are turned on, and sets the performance control board 12 to send a hit start 1 designation command (probability variable jackpot A), a hit start 2 designation command (probability variable jackpot B), a hit start 3 designation command (probability variable jackpot C), or a hit start 4 designation command (non-probability variable jackpot) according to the type of jackpot stored (step 029SGS185).

The CPU 103 also performs settings to send a game state designation command indicating the normal state to the performance control board 12 (step 029 SGS186).

Then, the jackpot display timer is set to a value equivalent to the jackpot display time (the time for announcing the occurrence of a jackpot, for example, on the image display device 5) (step 029SGS187). Also, the number of times the jackpot opening counter has been opened (for example, 10 times for a non-variable jackpot or a variable jackpot A, 5 times for a variable jackpot B, and 2 times for a variable jackpot C) is set (step 029SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "4", which is the value corresponding to the jackpot opening pre-processing (step S114) (step 029SGS189), and the special symbol stop processing is terminated.

On the other hand, if the jackpot flag is off (step 029SGS182; N), in step 029SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether the time-saving counter value is "0." If the time-saving counter value is "0" (step 029SGS190; Y), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196.

On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0" (step 029SGS190; N), that is, if the time-saving counter is in a high base state with remaining time-saving times, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS191). Then, it is determined whether the value of the time-saving counter after subtraction is "0" or not (step 029SGS193). If it is not "0" (step 029SGS193; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS196. If the value of the time-saving counter is "0" (step 029SGS193; Y), the process clears the time-saving flag to turn it off in order to end the time-saving control (step 029SGS194), sets the transmission of a game state designation command corresponding to the game state corresponding to the state of the probability change flag or the time-saving flag (specifically, the low probability low base state) (step 029SGS195), and then proceeds to step 029SGS196.

In step 029SGS196, the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which is the value corresponding to the normal processing of the special pattern, and then the special pattern stop processing is terminated.

Figure 11-19 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in S117 of Figure 6 as the jackpot end process.

In the jackpot end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the jackpot end display timer is operating, i.e., whether the timer is counting (step 029SGS201). If the jackpot end display timer is not operating (step 029SGS201; N), the jackpot end display timer is set to a value equivalent to the display time corresponding to the time for which the jackpot end display is performed on the image display device 5 (jackpot end display time) (step 029SGS202), and the processing ends.

On the other hand, if the jackpot end display timer is running (step 029SGS201; Y), the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step 029SGS203). The CPU 103 then checks whether the value of the jackpot end display timer is 0, i.e., whether the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204). If it has not elapsed, the process ends.

If the jackpot end display time has elapsed (step 029SGS204; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether the stored jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205).

If the stored jackpot type is not a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; N), the variable jackpot flag is turned on (step 029SGS207), the time-saving flag is turned on (step 029SGS208), the time-saving counter is set to "0" (step 029SGS209), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

On the other hand, if the jackpot type is a non-variable jackpot (step 029SGS205; Y), steps 029SGS211 and 029SGS212 are executed to turn on the time-saving flag and set the time-saving counter to "100", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS213.

In step 029SGS213, the jackpot flag is turned off, and a jackpot end command is sent according to the type of jackpot (step 029SGS214). Then, after sending a game state command to notify the performance control board 12 of the game state based on the ON-state probability flag and time-saving flag (step 029SGS215), the value of the special pattern process flag is updated to "0", which corresponds to the normal processing of the special pattern (step 029SGS216).

Next, the operation of the performance control board 12 will be described. FIG. 11-20 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S161 of FIG. 6 as the advance notice setting process. In the advance notice setting process shown in FIG. 11-20, the performance control CPU 120 first checks the start win reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS241), and determines whether there is a new command stored at the start win by checking whether there is an entry with the pending display flag value not set (step 029SGS242).

If there is no entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; N), the pre-reading notice setting process is terminated, and if there is an entry with the reserved display flag value not set (step 029SGS242; Y), it is further determined whether the symbol designation command of the entry is the first symbol designation command, that is, whether the symbol designation command is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243). If the symbol designation command is other than the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a jackpot (step 029SGS243; N), based on the variable display result being a jackpot, a pre-reading notice performance determination table (not shown) is referenced to determine whether to execute a pre-reading notice performance and the display pattern when the pre-reading notice performance is executed (step 029SGS245).

In step 029SGS245, for example, the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21 (A) is used to determine whether or not to execute the preview performance and the display pattern (preview type). Specifically, two types of display patterns (preview types) for the preview performance are provided: display pattern α and display pattern β. Of these, when the display pattern for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern α, the reserved memory display is displayed in a blue circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U, and when the display pattern (preview type) for the preview performance is determined to be display pattern β, the reserved memory display is displayed in a red circle in the first reserved memory display area 029SG5D or the second reserved memory display area 029SG5U.

In step 029SGS245, as shown in FIG. 11-21(A), for example, it is possible to determine not to execute the pre-reading preview performance 5% of the time, to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern α 30% of the time, and to execute the pre-reading preview performance in display pattern β 65% of the time.

Also, in step 029SGS243, if the symbol designation command of an entry for which the value of the pending display flag is not set is the first symbol designation command, that is, if it is a symbol designation command indicating a miss (step 029SGS243; Y), the variable category indicated by the variable category designation command of the entry is identified (step 029SGS247). Specifically, if the variable category designation command of the entry is C600H, it is identified as the category of the "non-reach" variable pattern, if it is C601H, it is identified as the category of the "super reach" variable pattern, and if it is C602H, it is identified as the category of the "other" variable pattern which includes normal reach.

Then, based on the numerical data indicating the random number value for the pre-reading preview performance extracted, for example, from the random number circuit 124 or the random counter of the performance control counter setting unit 029SG193, and the category of the fluctuation pattern identified in step 029SGS247, the pre-reading preview performance judgment table for misses (not shown) is referenced to determine whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (pre-notice type) when the pre-reading preview performance is executed (step 029SGS248).

In step 029SGS248, the display pattern (preview type) and whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance are determined using a determination ratio such as that shown in FIG. 11-21(B). In the example of setting the determination ratio shown in FIG. 11-21(B), the determination ratio of whether or not to execute the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern (preview type) is varied depending on the category of the variation pattern identified in the processing of step 029SGS247.

In step 029SGS247, as shown in FIG. 11-21(B), for example, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "non-reach", it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 95%, that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern α at a rate of 5%, and that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern β at a rate of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "other", it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 75%, that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern α at a rate of 20%, and that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern β at a rate of 5%. And, if the variable display result is a miss and the variable category is "super reach", it is determined that the pre-reading preview performance will not be executed at a rate of 65%, that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern α at a rate of 25%, and that the pre-reading preview performance will be executed with display pattern β at a rate of 10%.

With this setting, when it is decided to execute the look-ahead preview performance, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot than when it is decided not to execute the look-ahead preview performance, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the variable display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance. Furthermore, when the look-ahead preview performance is executed, the variable display result is more likely to be a jackpot when the look-ahead preview performance is executed in display pattern β than when it is executed in display pattern α, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to which display pattern the reserved memory display that is the target of the look-ahead preview performance will be displayed in.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the display pattern are determined at the same rate regardless of the jackpot type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and if the variable display result is a jackpot, the execution or non-execution of the pre-reading preview performance and the determination rate of the display pattern may be different depending on the jackpot type. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to which jackpot type jackpot game state is controlled depending on whether the pre-reading preview performance is executed or which display pattern the reserved memory display is displayed in.

After executing step 029SGS248, the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not a decision was made in step 029SGS247 to execute a pre-reading preview performance, i.e., whether or not the display pattern (preview type) was decided to be either display pattern α or display pattern β (step 029SGS249).

After step 029SGS245 is executed or if it is determined that a preview performance is to be executed (step 029SGS249; Y), the flag value corresponding to the determined display pattern (preview type) is set to the pending display flag of the entry (step 029SGS246). Specifically, if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern α, which indicates the pending memory display in a blue circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "1", and if the display pattern (preview type) determined in step 029SGS245 or step 029SGS248 is display pattern β, which indicates the pending memory display in a red circle, the pending display flag of the entry is set to "2", and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

Also, in step 029SGS249, if it has not been decided that a preview performance will be performed (step 029SGS249; N), the pending display flag for that entry is set to "0", which indicates a white circle (step 029SGS250), and then the process proceeds to step 029SGS252.

After executing step 029SGS246 or step 029SGS250, the performance control CPU 120 updates the hold display based on the memory contents of the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A (step 029SGS252). As a result, the hold memory newly stored in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A is displayed in a display mode corresponding to the "0", "1", or "2" set in the hold display flag.

Figure 11-22 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S171 of Figure 10 as the variable display start setting process. In the variable display start setting process shown in Figure 11-22, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271). If the first variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

In addition, if the first variable start command reception flag is off in step 029SGS271 (step 029SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273). If the second variable start command reception flag is off (step 029SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable start command reception flag is on (step 029SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning reception command buffer 029SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 029SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 029SGS272 or step 029SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 029SGS275).

Then, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 029SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 029SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as "7" as the stop symbol. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot B, or the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variable jackpot C, the stop symbol is determined from among multiple combinations of odd symbols other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative symbols such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability variable jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative symbols (jackpot pattern) in which three symbols are aligned as even symbols as the stop symbol. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a non-reach variation pattern, a combination of decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned (a miss pattern) is determined as the stopping pattern. Also, if the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss and the variable display variation pattern is a reach variation pattern, a reach-miss combination (a miss pattern) in which the left and right patterns are the same but the center pattern is different is determined as the stopping pattern.

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 executes a meter performance determination process to determine whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern (step 029SGS277), and judges whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern (step 029SGS278). Note that whether or not the change pattern of the variable display is a Super Reach change pattern can be determined by whether or not the change pattern designation command read in the processing of step 029SGS275 is a Super Reach change pattern.

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; N), proceed to step 029SGS283. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS278; Y), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the super reach γ, super reach ε, super reach θ, super reach ι, and super reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS280).

If the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is any of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029 SGS280; N), it is further determined whether the fluctuation pattern of the variable display is the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029 SGS281). If the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS281; Y), a reach performance E development suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, and the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 (step 029SGS282); if the change pattern of the variable display is that of a Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach η, or Super Reach λ (step 029SGS281; N), the process proceeds to step 029SGS283 without executing a reach performance E development notification effect determination process.

In addition, in the processing of step 029SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern and proceeds to step 029SGS289.

Then, in step 029SGS280, if the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029SGS280; Y), a branch destination suggestion effect determination process is executed to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern (step 029SGS284). Then, it is determined whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ (step 029SGS285).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; N), proceed to step 029SGS289. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is one of the Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ fluctuation patterns (step 029SGS285; Y), execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance decision process to determine whether or not to execute a reach performance G development suggestion performance (step 029SGS286). Then, the performance control CPU 120 determines the reach performance of the super reach to be executed during the variable display from reach performance C and reach performance D according to the variable display result and the fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS287), selects a process table according to the determined reach performance and fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS289 (step 029SGS288).

In the processing of step 029SGS287, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 11-30(A), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PB1-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 50%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 50%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PB1-7), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 30%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 70%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PB1-8), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach κ (PB1-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 20%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 80%.

On the other hand, if the variable display result is a miss, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (B), if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ (PA2-4), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 90%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 10%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε (PA2-6), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 80%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 20%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ (PA2-9), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 70%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 30%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι (PA2-10), the execution of reach performance C is determined at a rate of 0%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined at a rate of 100%. Furthermore, if the fluctuation pattern is that of Super Reach κ (PA2-11), the execution of reach performance C is determined with a probability of 60%, and the execution of reach performance D is determined with a probability of 40%.

As shown in Figures 11-30(A) and 11-30(B), the execution of reach effects C and D is determined at different rates according to the variation pattern when the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, so that the overall expectation of a jackpot is set higher for reach effects D than for reach effects C, as shown in Figure 11-30(C).

In addition, regardless of the variable display result, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a reach performance H development notification performance and a reach performance H are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), the execution of a reach performance D is always decided. On the other hand, when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (a fluctuation pattern in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance and a reach performance I are executed after the execution of a pre-performance and a premonition performance), there are cases in which a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed.

In other words, in this feature section 029SG, for the variation patterns in which the pre-effect and premonition effects are executed during the variable display (the variation patterns of the Super Reach ι and the Super Reach κ), the rate at which the high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed in this feature section 029 after the execution of the pre-effect and premonition effects (the rate at which the reach effect I with the highest expectation of a jackpot is executed) is set higher when the execution of the reach effect C is decided than when the execution of the reach effect D is decided. Therefore, in this feature section 029SG, even if the reach effect C with a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach effect D is executed during the variable display, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the pre-effect and premonition effects are executed after the reach effect C, so that it is possible to prevent the player from recognizing that the expectation of a jackpot is low at the time the reach effect C is executed, and thus preventing a decrease in interest in the game during the execution of the reach effect C.

Furthermore, when comparing the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ, in which the variable display result is first announced as reach performance C or reach performance D and then a reach performance G development announcement performance is executed, with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ, in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance development announcement performance are executed in place of reach performance C or reach performance D while the variable display result is being executed, as shown in Figure 11-30 (D), when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach κ is set to 60%. Also, as shown in FIG. 11-30 (E), when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach θ is 40%, whereas the difference between the determination rate of reach performance C and the determination rate of reach performance D in the fluctuation pattern of super reach κ is set to 20%.

For this reason, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach θ and the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach κ can be inferred, depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, as to whether the variable display is a variable display of the super reach κ in which a pre-performance, a precursor performance, and a high expectation reach performance notification performance are executed while reach performance C or reach performance D is being executed, or a variable display of the super reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification performance is executed after a variable display result (miss) is once notified as reach performance C or reach performance D, so that the player can pay attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, which can increase the interest in the game.

Returning to FIG. 11-22, in step 029SGS289, the presentation control CPU 120 executes a chance-up presentation determination process to determine whether or not to execute a chance-up presentation that indicates an increase in the probability that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the expected probability of a jackpot) during the variable display, and to determine the presentation pattern of the chance-up presentation (step 029SGS289).

After executing the chance-up effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 then starts the process timer corresponding to the process timer selected in the processing of step 029SGS283 or step 029SGS288 (step 029SGS290).

In each process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbered 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 213 SGS288). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R (step 029 SGS290).

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the variable display time specified by the variation pattern designation command (step 029SGS292). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 029SGS293). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data indicating the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns to the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, and the image display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variable display (variation) of the decorative patterns. Next, the value of the performance control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variable display in progress performance process (step S172), and the variable display start setting process is terminated (step 213SGS291).

In addition, during the variable display performance process, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the process timer by 1 each time the variable display performance process is executed, and determines whether the value of the process timer has timed out. If the process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to that process timer, and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched, the next process timer is started, and the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the next process data. In this way, the variable display of the decorative pattern in this feature part 029SG is executed.

Figure 11-23 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing executed in step S029SGS277 of Figure 11-22 as the meter performance determination processing. In the meter performance determination processing shown in Figure 11-23, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the change pattern of the variable display is any one of the change patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ (step 029SGS301). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ (step 029 SGS301; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the fluctuation patterns of non-reach, shortened non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ (step 029 SGS301; N), it is determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a shortened non-reach fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS302; Y), the meter performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the non-reach, normal reach, super reach α, super reach β, super reach δ, super reach ζ, super reach η, and super reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS302; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a meter performance and the performance pattern according to the fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS303).

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-24 (A), when the fluctuation pattern is a non-reach (non-reach without shortening) fluctuation pattern, it is decided not to execute the meter performance at a rate of 90%, to execute meter performance pattern A at a rate of 10%, to execute meter performance pattern B at a rate of 0%, to execute meter performance pattern C at a rate of 0%, to execute meter performance pattern D at a rate of 0%, to execute meter performance pattern E at a rate of 0%, and to execute meter performance pattern F at a rate of 0%. Also, if the fluctuation pattern is a normal reach fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 20%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 25%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 50%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, if the fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ fluctuation patterns, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 10%, meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 15%, meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 40%, meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 30%, meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is that of super reach η, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 5%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 95%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 0%.

In addition, when the fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, the meter performance is not executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern A is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern B is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern C is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern D is executed at a rate of 0%, the meter performance pattern E is executed at a rate of 0%, and the meter performance pattern F is executed at a rate of 100%.

As shown in Figures 11-24(B) and 11-25, pattern A in the meter performance is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening), pattern B is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing and at the second timing after the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the reach (the period from the start of the variable display to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a non-reach fluctuation pattern without shortening) (a total of two steps increase), and pattern C is a performance pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step at the first timing, the second timing, and at the third timing during the period from the reach to the start of the reach performance of the super reach (the period from the reach to the announcement of the variable display result in the case of a normal reach fluctuation pattern).

Pattern D is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, and the fourth timing when reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed (for a total of four steps).Pattern E is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, the second timing, the third timing, the fourth timing, and the fifth timing when reach performance A is being executed and which is after the fourth timing (before the start timing of the high expectation reach performance start/stop notification performance).Pattern F is an effect pattern in which the meter 029SG005M increases by five steps at the second timing.

Returning to FIG. 11-23, after executing the process of 029SGS303, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304). If it has not decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; N), the meter performance decision process ends. If it has decided to execute a meter performance (step 029SGS304; Y), the decided performance pattern of the meter performance is stored (step 029SGS305), a meter performance start waiting timer corresponding to the fluctuation pattern is set, and the meter performance decision process ends (step 029SGS306).

When it has been decided that a meter performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the meter performance start waiting timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the value of the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the meter performance start waiting timer has timed out, it selects a meter performance process table corresponding to the performance pattern of the determined meter performance, and starts the meter performance process timer. Thereafter, it decrements the value of the meter performance process timer by 1 each time it executes the performance process during variable display, and determines whether the meter performance process timer has timed out. If the meter performance process timer has not timed out, it executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the meter performance process timer, and if the meter performance process timer has timed out, it switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, it is possible to perform a meter performance during variable display.

As described above, in this feature section 029SG, by executing a meter effect during variable display, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the meter 029SG005M increases to five stages, and whether or not a high expectation reach effect development effect is executed as a result of the meter 029SG005M increasing to five stages.

Figure 11-26 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS282 of Figure 11-22 as the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process. In the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision process shown in Figure 11-26, the performance control CPU 120 first decides whether or not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance according to the change pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS311). For example, as shown in Figure 11-26 (B), when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach δ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 50% of the time. On the other hand, when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ζ, it decides not to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 20% of the time, and decides to execute the reach performance E development suggestion performance 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS311 that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312). If it has not been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; N), the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS312; Y), the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance E development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS313).

When it has been decided that the reach performance E development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance E development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the reach performance E development suggestion performance is selected, and the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is started. After that, the value of the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance processing during variable display is executed, and it is determined whether the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance E development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the Super Reach ζ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the Super Reach δ variation pattern in which the reach performance E development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ variation patterns, the player is drawn to the fact that after the execution of the reach performance B, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed or not, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

Figure 11-27 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS284 of Figure 11-22 as the branch destination suggestion effect determination process. In the branch destination suggestion effect determination process shown in Figure 11-27, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the effect pattern according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display (step 029SGS321).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-28(A), when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach γ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 90% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X in 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y in 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z in 0% of the time. Also, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ε, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 70% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X in 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y in 0% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z in 0% of the time.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach θ, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 50%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 15%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 5%. In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is that of a super reach ι, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern X at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Y at a rate of 70%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is determined to be executed in pattern Z at a rate of 10%. Furthermore, if the variation pattern of the variable display is that of a super reach κ, the branch destination suggestion effect is not executed at a rate of 10%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern X at a rate of 30%, the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Y at a rate of 20%, and the branch destination suggestion effect is executed in pattern Z at a rate of 40%.

As shown in FIG. 11-28 (B), pattern X of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion image X is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting both the execution of a reach performance H development notification effect and the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, pattern Y of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion image Y is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting the execution of a reach performance H development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, and pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion effect is a presentation pattern in which a branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5, suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification effect during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D.

In this characteristic part 029SG, among patterns X to Z, pattern Z is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and Y when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed, that is, pattern Z is a performance pattern with a higher execution expectation of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance than patterns X and Y (execution expectation of high expectation reach performance development notification performance: pattern Z > pattern Y, pattern Z > pattern X). Also, pattern Y is determined to be executed at a higher rate than patterns X and X when a reach performance H development notification performance is executed, that is, pattern Y is a performance pattern with a higher execution expectation of a reach performance H development notification performance than patterns X and Z (execution expectation of a reach performance H development notification performance: pattern Y > pattern Z, pattern Y > pattern X).

As shown in FIG. 11-28(A), the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern differs depending on the fluctuation pattern of the variable display, not depending on the variable display result. In other words, the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern is determined depending on whether or not it develops into any of reach presentations G to I after reach presentation C or reach presentation D is executed, and which of reach presentations G to I it develops into, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the decision ratio of whether or not a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed and the presentation pattern may differ depending on both the fluctuation pattern of the variable display and the variable display result, or may differ only depending on the variable display result.

Returning to FIG. 11-27, the presentation control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS321 that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232). If it has not been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; N), the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated. If it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion presentation should be executed (step 029SGS232; Y), the presentation pattern of the decided branch destination suggestion presentation is stored (step 029SGS323), a timer for waiting for the start of the branch destination suggestion presentation is set, and the branch destination suggestion presentation determination processing is terminated (step 029SGS324).

When it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion performance will be performed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and determines whether the value of the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, a branch destination suggestion performance process table corresponding to the determined performance pattern of the branch destination suggestion performance is selected, and the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the branch destination suggestion performance process timer is decremented by 1 each time the performance process during variable display is performed, and it is determined whether the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the performance device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the branch destination suggestion performance process timer, and if the branch destination suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a branch destination suggestion performance can be performed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, by displaying any one of the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, and branch destination suggestion image Z on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the fact that the variable display result is not notified as the reach performance C or reach performance D and the game switches to the pre-performance. Furthermore, depending on whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5 during the execution period of the reach performance C or reach performance D, the rate at which the reach performance H development notification performance is executed after the pre-performance and the precursor performance and the rate at which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed differ, so that the player can also pay attention to whether the branch destination suggestion image X, branch destination suggestion image Y, or branch destination suggestion image Z is displayed on the image display device 5, which increases the interest in the game.

Figure 11-29 is a flowchart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS286 of Figure 11-22 as the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process. In the reach performance G development suggestion performance determination process shown in Figure 11-29, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether or not to execute the reach performance G development suggestion performance according to the fluctuation pattern of the variable display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-29(B), when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach ε, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 50% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 50% of the time. Also, when the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach θ, the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 20% of the time, and the reach performance G development suggestion effect is determined to be executed 80% of the time.

Then, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided in the processing of step 029SGS331 that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332). If it has not been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; N), the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated, and if it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance should be executed (step 029SGS332; Y), the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer is set and the reach performance G development suggestion performance decision processing is terminated (step 029SGS333).

When it has been decided that the reach performance G development suggestion performance will be executed, the performance control CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out. At this time, if the reach performance G development suggestion performance start waiting timer has timed out, the CPU 120 selects a process table for the reach performance G development suggestion performance and starts the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer. After that, the CPU 120 decrements the value of the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer by 1 each time the performance processing during the variable display is executed, and determines whether the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out. If the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has not timed out, the CPU 120 executes control of the performance device according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer, and if the reach performance G development suggestion performance process timer has timed out, the CPU 120 switches the process data and starts the next process data. In this way, the reach performance G development suggestion performance can be executed during the variable display.

In particular, in this feature part 029SG, the reach performance E development suggestion effect is executed at a higher rate in the variable display in the super reach θ variation pattern in which the reach performance G notification effect is executed than in the variable display in the super reach ε variation pattern in which the reach performance G development notification effect is not executed. Therefore, in the variable display in these super reach ε and super reach θ variation patterns, the player is drawn to the attention of whether or not the reach performance G development suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D, and this increases the interest in the game.

Figure 11-31 is a flow chart showing an example of the process executed in step S029SGS289 of Figure 11-22 as the chance-up effect determination process. In the chance-up effect determination process shown in Figure 11-31, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a non-reach or normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS340; Y), the chance-up effect determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach fluctuation pattern, it further determines whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a super reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029SGS341).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; Y), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is not the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS341; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS342).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any one of the Super Reach α, Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, Super Reach ζ, Super Reach η, and Super Reach λ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS342; N), it is further determined whether the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS343). If the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach α or Super Reach η fluctuation pattern (step 029 SGS343; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance A and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029 SGS344).

Here, the contents of reach performance A to reach performance I in this feature part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 11-32(A) to Fig. 11-32(E). As shown in Fig. 11-32(A) to Fig. 11-32(I), reach performance A to reach performance I are each composed of a reach title display period in which the title of each reach performance is displayed on the image display device 5, followed by a battle performance execution period in which a battle performance between an ally character and an enemy character is displayed on the image display device 5.

During the reach title display period of each of these reach effects A to I, the reach title can be displayed in red as part of the chance-up effect (see Figure 11-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance execution period of reach performance A to reach performance D, a movable body operation possible period in which the movable body 32 can be operated and a cut-in image display possible period in which a cut-in image can be displayed on the image display device 5 are provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and it is possible to execute the operation of the movable body 32 in the movable body operation possible period and the display of a cut-in image in the cut-in image display possible period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 11-33 (A)).

In addition, for the battle performance periods of reach performance C and reach performance D, a period in which a branch destination suggestion performance can be executed is provided after the period in which the movable object can be operated and the period in which a cut-in image can be displayed.

In addition, with regard to the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, a movable body operation period is provided in the first half of the battle performance execution period, and an operation promotion image display period is provided in the second half of the battle performance execution period (near the end timing of the battle performance) during which an operation promotion image is displayed to encourage the player to operate the push button 31B or stick controller 31A in order to notify the player of the variable display result in response to the operation of the push button 31B or stick controller 31A on the image display device 5. Note that the operation promotion image display period is usually the period during which the image of the push button 31B is displayed.

In this feature part 029SG, during the battle execution period of reach performance E and reach performance F, it is possible to execute the movement of the movable body during the movable body operable period and to display an image of the stick controller 31A during the operation prompting image display period as part of the chance-up performance (see FIG. 11-33 (B)).

Note that there is no movable object operable period, no cut-in image display period, and no operation prompting image display period for reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I. In other words, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I are reach performances in which the chance-up performance is never executed.

Returning to step 029SGS344 in FIG. 11-31, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), if the variable display result is a miss, the effect control CPU 120 determines not to execute the chance up effect with a probability of 60%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 5%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the effect determines not to execute the chance up effect with pattern P with a probability of 35%, to execute the chance up effect with pattern Q with a probability of 60%, and to execute the chance up effect with pattern R with a probability of 0%.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS347. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect A is being executed (step 029SGS345; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect A according to the fluctuation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS347 (step 029SGS346).

In step 029SGS347, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach α (step 029SGS347; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of super reach η (step 029SGS347; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of reach performance F and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS348).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(B), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect F is being executed (step 029SGS349; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect F is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS350).

In addition, if the change pattern of the variable display in step 029SGS343 is any of Super Reach β, Super Reach δ, and Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS343; N), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B and the performance pattern according to the variable display result (step 029SGS351).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect B is being executed (step 029SGS352). If it has not decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect B is being executed (step 029SGS352; N), it proceeds to step 029SGS354. If it has decided to execute a chance-up effect while reach effect B is being executed (step 029SGS352; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect B according to the variation pattern, and proceeds to step 029SGS354 (step 029SGS353).

In step 029SGS354, the performance control CPU 120 judges whether the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354). If the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach δ (step 029SGS354; N), the chance up performance determination process is terminated, and if the change pattern of the variable display is the change pattern of Super Reach ζ (step 029SGS354; Y), the presence or absence of chance up performance during the execution of Reach performance E and the performance pattern are determined according to the variable display result (step 029SGS355).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(D), if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern S 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern T 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern U 0% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356). If it has not been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; N), the chance-up effect decision process is terminated. If it has been decided to execute a chance-up effect while the reach effect E is being executed (step 029SGS356; Y), the decided effect pattern is stored, and a chance-up effect start timer for the reach effect E is set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the chance-up effect decision process is terminated (step 029SGS357).

In addition, if the variable display change pattern in the processing of step 029SGS342 is one of the Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ change patterns (step 029SGS342; Y), the performance control CPU 120 further determines whether the variable display change pattern is one of the Super Reach γ and Super Reach ε change patterns (step 029SGS358).

If the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; N), the chance-up performance determination process is terminated, and if the variable display fluctuation pattern is any of the Super Reach γ or Super Reach ε fluctuation patterns (step 029 SGS358; Y), the performance control CPU 120 determines whether or not to execute a chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and the performance pattern, depending on the variable display result (step 029 SGS359).

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-34(A), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect C, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 60% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 5% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 5% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 35% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 60% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 0% of the time.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 11-34(C), when the reach effect to be executed is reach effect D, if the variable display result is a miss, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 40% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 30% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 20% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 10% of the time. Also, if the variable display result is a jackpot, the chance up effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern P in 20% of the time, the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern Q in 30% of the time, and the chance up effect is determined to be executed in pattern R in 40% of the time.

Then, the effect control CPU 120 judges whether or not it has decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360). If it has not decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; N), it ends the chance-up effect decision process, and if it has decided to execute a chance-up effect during the execution of reach effect C or reach effect D (step 029SGS360; Y), it stores the decided effect pattern and sets a chance-up effect start timer for reach effect C or reach effect D according to the variation pattern, and ends the chance-up effect decision process (step 029SGS361).

When it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the chance-up effect start waiting timer by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and determines whether the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect start waiting timer has timed out, a process table for the chance-up effect is selected, and the chance-up effect process timer is started. Thereafter, the value of the chance-up effect process timer is decremented by 1 each time the effect processing during variable display is executed, and a determination is made as to whether the chance-up effect process timer has timed out. If the chance-up effect process timer has not timed out, the effect control device is controlled according to the contents of the process data corresponding to the chance-up effect process timer, and if the chance-up effect process timer has timed out, the process data is switched and the next process data is started. In this way, a chance-up effect can be executed during variable display.

In particular, in this feature section 029SG, the likelihood of a jackpot varies depending on whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the number of times the chance-up effect is executed during the execution period of the reach effect, so that the player can pay attention to the number of times the chance-up effect is executed and whether or not the chance-up effect is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

Furthermore, in reach effects such as reach effects A to D, which have a relatively low probability of winning, a maximum of three chance-up effects are executed, so that during the execution of reach effects A to D, the player can be effectively suggested that the variable display result will be a jackpot depending on the number of chance-up effects executed.

On the other hand, in reach effects with a high probability of winning, such as reach effects G to I, the chance-up effect can only be executed once during the reach effect, so that the interest in the reach effect with a high probability of winning is prevented from decreasing by executing the chance-up effect multiple times unnecessarily.

As shown in FIG. 11-34 (E), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentations in reach presentations A to D, pattern P is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 does not move and a cut-in image is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 moves but a cut-in image is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 moves, and the cut-in image is displayed.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 11-34 (F), among the presentation patterns of the chance-up presentation in reach presentation E and reach presentation F, pattern S is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red but the movable body 32 is not moved and the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, pattern Q is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red and the movable body 32 is moved but the image of the stick controller 31A is not displayed, and pattern R is a presentation pattern in which the reach title is displayed in red, the movable body 32 is moved, and the image of the stick controller 31A is all displayed.

As described above, as shown in Fig. 11-34(A) to Fig. 11-34(D), in the chance up performance of this feature part 029SG, when the chance up performance is not executed, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest for the chance up performances in reach performance A to reach performance D as a whole, and when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is not executed. When the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern P. And when the chance up performance is executed in pattern R, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up performance is executed in pattern Q (jackpot expectation for chance up performances in reach performance A to reach performance D: pattern R > pattern Q > pattern P > non-execution).

In addition, for the chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F as a whole, the jackpot expectation is set to be the lowest when the chance up effect is not executed, and the jackpot expectation is set to be higher when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S than when the chance up effect is not executed. When the chance up effect is executed in pattern T, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern S. And when the chance up effect is executed in pattern RU, the jackpot expectation is set to be higher than when the chance up effect is executed in pattern T (jackpot expectation for chance up effects in reach effects E and reach effects F: pattern U > pattern T > pattern S > not executed).

Comparing the cases where reach performance A to reach performance D are executed with the cases where reach performance E or reach performance F is executed, in reach performance A to reach performance D, pattern P and pattern Q are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern R is executable only when reach performance B or reach performance D is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in any of reach performance A to reach performance D, while the display of the cut-in image 029SG200 is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance B and reach performance D.

Furthermore, comparing the case where reach performance E is executed with the case where reach performance F is executed, in reach performance E and reach performance F, pattern S and pattern T are set as commonly executable performance patterns, while pattern U is executable only when reach performance F is executed. In other words, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are performances that can be executed in either reach performance E or reach performance F, while the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as the operation prompting image is a performance that can be executed only in reach performance F.

Next, the presentation of the variable display of the Super Reach in this feature part 029SG will be explained based on Fig. 11-35 to Fig. 11-56. First, a case where Reach presentation A is executed as the reach presentation of the Super Reach will be explained. Note that the meter 029SG005M at the start timing of the variable display is displayed as not having increased by even one step. As shown in Fig. 11-35(A) to Fig. 11-35(D), when it is decided to execute the meter presentation at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG shows the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first and second timings before the reach and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 11-35 (E) and 11-35 (F), when reach performance A starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance A and an expectation image 029SG251 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG161A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG161B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance A.

When the display of the title image of reach effect A ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-35(G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 11-36(H).

In addition, during the battle performance, if it is decided to execute a chance-up performance in the performance pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movement of the movable body 32 from the origin position toward the performance position is executed as shown in FIG. 11-36 (I). Note that the movement of the movable body 32 as a chance-up performance is a movement from the origin position toward the performance position, but the movement of the movable body 32 ends at a position intermediate between the origin position and the performance position. After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-36 (J) and 11-36 (K).

When the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α Miss Variable Pattern (PA2-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (L) and 11-36 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-2), as shown in Figures 11-36 (N) and 11-36 (O), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A wins over enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle performance (reach performance A) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach η variable display, as shown in Figures 11-37 (P) and 11-37 (Q), at the fifth timing after the end of the cut-in image display period, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step (up to five steps) and becomes full. Then, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to five steps (become full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (R), the battle presentation is interrupted midway, and instead of the battle presentation, the high expectation reach presentation development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation. Then, the reach presentation F is started. Details of the high expectation reach presentation development notification presentation will be described later in FIG. 11-55.

As shown in Figures 11-37 (S) and 11-37 (T), when reach performance F starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image of the reach performance F and an expectation image 029SG256 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance A. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG166A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG166B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance F.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect F ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (U). During the battle effect, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-36 (V) and FIG. 11-36 (W). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Figures 11-38 (X), 11-38 (Y), and 11-38 (Z), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach η miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-8), as shown in Figures 11-39(a) and 11-39(b), the result of the battle performance is that ally character B is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance F) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach η jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-6), as shown in Figures 11-39(c) and 11-39(d), the result of the battle presentation is that ally character B wins over enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation F) ends, the decorative symbols are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance B is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that the meter 029SG005M is displayed as not having increased by even one step at the start timing of the variable display. As shown in Figures 11-40(A) to 11-40(D), when it is decided to execute the meter performance at the start of the variable display (this feature part 029SG discloses the case where execution of pattern D or pattern E is decided), the meter 029SG005M increases by one step each at the first timing, which is the timing before the reach, the second timing, and the third timing after the reach.

As shown in Figures 11-40 (E) and 11-40 (F), when reach performance B starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance B and an expectation image 029SG252 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance B. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG162A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, a title image 029SG162B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance B.

When the display of the title image of reach effect B ends, a battle effect between ally character B and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (G). Note that, even during the battle effect, the meter 029SG005M increases by another step at the fourth timing, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (H).

In addition, during the battle presentation, if it is decided to execute a chance-up presentation in the presentation pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (I). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 will be displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figures 11-41 (J) and 11-41 (K).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β miss variable pattern (PA2-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (L) and 11-41 (M), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3), as shown in Figures 11-41 (N) and 11-41 (O), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character B defeats enemy character A, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation B) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach δ or Super Reach ζ variable display, as shown in Figures 11-42 (P) and 11-42 (Q), after the end of the period in which the cut-in image can be displayed, friendly character B is defeated by enemy character A, and the player is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance B) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance E development suggestion performance will be performed, a reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so that the display position of the decorative symbols overlaps in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (R).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach δ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (S), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (T), after the reach performance E development suggestion performance execution period, a reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed as a reach performance E development notification performance. Then, the reach performance E starts.

As shown in Figures 11-42 (U) and 11-42 (V), when the reach performance E starts, the image display device 5 first displays a title image of the reach performance E and an expectation image 029SG255 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance E. At this time, if the execution of a chance up performance has not been decided, a title image 029SG165A with black title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E, whereas if the execution of a chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern S, Pattern T, or Pattern U, a title image 029SG165B with red title letters is displayed as the title image of the reach performance E.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect E ends, a battle effect between ally character A and enemy character B begins, as shown in FIG. 11-42 (W). During the battle effect, if it has been decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern T or pattern U, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position toward the intermediate position, as shown in FIG. 11-43 (X) and FIG. 11-43 (Y). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

As the battle performance progresses, as shown in Fig. 11-43(Z), Fig. 11-43(a), and Fig. 11-43(b), an operation prompting image is displayed in the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A. At this time, if the execution of the chance-up performance has not been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the push button 31B is displayed as the operation prompting image, whereas if the execution of the chance-up performance has been determined in the performance pattern of pattern U, an image of the stick controller 31A is displayed as the operation prompting image.

After the operation prompting image is displayed on the image display device 5, when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A, or when the operation acceptance period for these operation means ends, the variable display result is notified as the performance result of the battle performance.

Specifically, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a Super Reach ζ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-7), as shown in Figures 11-44(c) and 11-44(d), the result of the battle performance is that friendly character A is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance E) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ζ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-5), as shown in Figures 11-44(e) and 11-44(f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character A defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation E) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 11-42 (Q) to Figure 11-42 (T).

First, as shown in Fig. 11-45(A) to Fig. 11-45(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance E development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance E development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends, as shown in Fig. 11-45(C) to Fig. 11-45(D), the display of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 ends once, and then the second display of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 is performed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second-stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first-stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first-stage reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach δ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach performance E development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ζ, as shown in FIG. 11-45(F), the reach performance E development notification image 029SG181 is displayed on the image display device 5 as the reach performance E development notification performance, and the reach performance E is executed.

Next, we will explain the case where reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach. Note that when reach performance C or reach performance D is executed as the reach performance of the super reach, the meter performance is not executed, so the explanation of the period from the start of the variable display to the reach is omitted.

When reach performance C is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-46(A) to Fig. 11-46(C), when reach performance C starts, the title image of the reach performance C and the expectation image 029SG253 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance C are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG163A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C, whereas if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG163B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance C.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect C ends, a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (C).

On the other hand, when reach performance D is executed, as shown in Fig. 11-46(D) to Fig. 11-46(F), when reach performance D is started, the title image of the reach performance D and the expectation image 029SG254 showing the expectation of a big win of the reach performance D are displayed on the image display device 5 first. At this time, if the execution of the chance up performance has not been decided, the title image 029SG164A with the title letters in black is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D, while if the execution of the chance up performance has been decided in any of the performance patterns of Pattern P, Pattern Q, or Pattern R, the title image 029SG164B with the title letters in red is displayed as the title image of the reach performance D.

Then, when the display of the title image of reach effect D ends, a battle effect between ally character D and enemy character A begins, as shown in FIG. 11-46 (F).

In addition, during the battle effects of reach effects C or reach effects D, if it is decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern Q or pattern R, the movable body 32 moves (moves) from the origin position to the intermediate position, as shown in Figure 11-47 (G) and Figure 11-47 (H). After that, the movable body 32 returns from the intermediate position to the origin position.

Furthermore, if it is decided that a chance-up effect will be executed in the effect pattern of pattern R, the cut-in image 029SG200 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in Figure 11-47 (I) and Figure 11-47 (J).

Also, as shown in Figures 11-47 (K) to 11-47- (M), if it has been decided that a branch destination suggestion effect will be executed, after the period during which a cut-in image can be displayed during the battle effect of reach effect C or reach effect D, the image display device 5 will display, as a branch destination suggestion effect, one of the following images: a branch destination suggestion image X (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005X) suggesting that both a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) and a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed; a branch destination suggestion image Y (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Y) suggesting that a reach effect H development notification effect (reach effect H) will be executed; or a branch destination suggestion image Z (branch destination suggestion image 029SG005Z) suggesting that a high expectation reach effect development notification effect (reach effect I) will be executed.

After the period when the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach γ miss variation pattern (PA2-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (N) to 11-48 (P), if reach effect C is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss, and if reach effect D is being executed, the result of the battle effect is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character A, thereby informing the player that the variable display is a miss. Then, after the battle effect (reach effect C or reach effect D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display in the Super Reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-4), as shown in Figures 11-48 (Q) to 11-48 (S), when reach performance C is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character C wins over enemy character A, and when reach performance D is being executed, the variable display notifies the player that it is a jackpot as a result of the battle performance that ally character D wins over enemy character A. Then, after the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination that indicates a miss.

In addition, if the variable display is a Super Reach ε or Super Reach θ variable display, as shown in Figure 11-49 (T) to Figure 11-49 (V), after the end of the period in which the branch destination suggestion performance can be executed, friendly character C or friendly character D is defeated by enemy character A, and the user is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

After the battle performance (reach performance C or reach performance D) ends, a swinging display is performed with a combination that indicates a loss of the decorative symbols. At this time, if it has been decided that a reach performance G development suggestion performance will be performed, a reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so that its display position overlaps with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion performance, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (W).

When the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ε variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (X), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the swinging of the decorative pattern stops and it is notified again that the variable display is a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-49 (Y), after the reach performance G development suggestion performance execution period, the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 is displayed as a reach performance G development notification performance. Then, the reach performance G starts.

As shown in FIG. 11-50(Z), when a reach performance G starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG167 of the reach performance G and an expectation image 029SG257 indicating the expectation of a big win for the reach performance G.

When the display of the title image 029SG167 of the reach effect G ends, as shown in Figures 11-50(a) and 11-50(b), a battle effect between ally character C and enemy character B begins. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the super reach θ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-9), as shown in Figures 11-50(c) and 11-50(d), the result of the battle effect is that ally character C is defeated by enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle effect (reach effect G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach θ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-7), as shown in Figures 11-50 (e) and 11-50 (f), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character C defeats enemy character B, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation G) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the presentation mode of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation shown in Figure 11-49 (V) to Figure 11-49 (Y).

First, as shown in Fig. 11-54(A) to Fig. 11-54(B), when it has been decided to execute a reach performance G development suggestion effect, in a state where the decorative symbols are displayed oscillatingly in a combination indicating a miss, the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative symbols in the display area of the image display device 5 as a reach performance G development suggestion effect. Note that the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is less visible to the player, such as having a lower brightness or fewer display colors than other images displayed in the display area such as decorative symbols.

After the first display period of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends, as shown in Fig. 11-54(C) to Fig. 11-54(D), the display of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 ends once, and then the second stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 is displayed again so as to overlap with the decorative pattern. Note that the second stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171 may be an image that is more visible to the player than the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171, such as being brighter or having more display colors than the first stage of the reach performance G development suggestion image 029SG171.

When the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach ε, as shown in FIG. 11-45(E), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is not executed as the reach performance G development notification performance, and the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss. On the other hand, when the variable display is a variable display based on the variation pattern of super reach θ, as shown in FIG. 11-54(F), the display of the reach performance G development notification image 029SG182 on the image display device 5 is executed as the reach performance G development notification performance.

In addition, if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern or a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in Figures 11-51 (g) to 11-51 (h), after the branch destination suggestion effect can be executed during the execution of Reach effect C or Reach effect D, a shutter image 029SG006 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as a pre-effect (the shutter image 029SG006 is moved from the left and right of the display area toward the center of the display area), and the effect image displayed on the image display device 5 becomes temporarily invisible due to the shutter image 029SG006.

When the execution period of the pre-effect ends due to the passage of a predetermined period of time, the shutter image 029SG006 retreats from the center of the display area of the image display device 5 to the left and right as a premonition effect, and the image of character C becomes visible to the player in the display area of the image display device 5 in response to the retreat of the shutter image 029SG006.

When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach ι variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-51(i), a reach performance H development notification image 029SG183 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a reach performance H development notification performance, and then a reach performance H is executed. When the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variable pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-51(j), a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed on the image display device 5 as a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and then a reach performance I is executed. Details of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be described later in FIG. 11-55.

When the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display with a Super Reach ι fluctuation pattern, as shown in FIG. 11-52 (k), when the reach performance H starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H and the expectation image 029SG258 indicating the expectation of a jackpot for the reach performance H.

When the display of the title image 029SG168 of the reach performance H ends, as shown in FIG. 11-52(l) and FIG. 11-52(m), a battle performance between ally character D and enemy character C begins. If the variable display change pattern is a super reach i miss change pattern (PA2-10), as shown in FIG. 11-52(n) and FIG. 11-52(o), the result of the battle performance is that ally character D is defeated by enemy character C, and the variable display result is notified that it is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is a variable display of the Super Reach ι jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-8), as shown in Figure 11-52 (p) and Figure 11-52 (q), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly character D defeats enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

In addition, when the variable display fluctuation pattern is a variable display in the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, as shown in Fig. 11-53(r) to Fig. 11-53(s), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, the image display device 5 first displays the title image 029SG169 of the reach performance I and the expectation image 029SG259 showing the jackpot expectation of the reach performance I. At this time, the image display device 5 displays images of Characters A to C behind the title image 029SG169 and expectation image 029SG259 of the reach performance I, thereby creating a sense of exclusivity due to the fact that the reach performance I has a higher jackpot expectation than other Super Reach reach performances.

When the display of the title image 029SG169 of reach performance I ends, as shown in Figures 11-53(t) and 11-53(u), a battle performance begins between ally character A to ally character D and enemy character C. If the variable display fluctuation pattern is the Super Reach κ miss fluctuation pattern (PA2-11), as shown in Figures 11-53(v) and 11-53(w), the result of the battle performance is that ally character A to ally character D are defeated by enemy character C, and it is announced that the variable display result is a miss, and after the battle performance (reach performance H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a combination indicating a miss.

On the other hand, if the variable display is the variable display of the Super Reach κ jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-9), as shown in Figures 11-53 (x) and 11-53 (y), the result of the battle presentation is that friendly characters A to D defeat enemy character C, thereby announcing that the variable display result is a jackpot, and after the battle presentation (reach presentation H) ends, the decorative patterns are displayed in a stopped combination indicating a jackpot.

Here, we will explain in more detail the high-expectation reach performance development notification effects shown in Figures 11-37 (R) to 11-37 (T) and 11-53 (r) to 11-53 (s).

First, as shown in Figures 11-55(A) to 11-55(B), when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance starts, a high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 to notify that reach performance F or reach performance I will be executed. Furthermore, after the high expectation reach performance development notification image 029SG180 is displayed, a blackout performance is executed in which the display area of the image display device 5 is darkened to make it difficult to see the performance image displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, in the blackout effect, a darkened image is displayed on the image display device 5, making it difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images), and the brightness of the display screen itself is reduced, while the volume of the effect sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed. Furthermore, the amount of light emitted by the various light-emitting means (e.g., LEDs, etc.) provided in the game area, movable body 32, glass door frame, and game machine frame 3 is reduced compared to before the high expectation reach effect development notification effect was executed, making it even more difficult to see other effect images (such as the variable display images of decorative patterns and character images).

After the blackout effect is executed, an image of character C is displayed as a pre-effect, as shown in FIG. 11-55(C). In the pre-effect, the lines spoken by character C are further displayed as text image 029SG007 in the display area of image display device 5, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L and 8R.

As shown in FIG. 11-55(D) and FIG. 11-55(E), a switching performance is executed after the first performance ends, and a second performance is executed after the first performance ends. As the switching performance, an image different from the image of character C displayed in the first performance is displayed. Note that, in this feature section 029SG, an example is shown in which only one image is displayed as the switching performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any one of a plurality of images may be displayed as the switching performance. Note that, when any one of a plurality of images is displayed as the switching performance in this way, the proportion controlled to the jackpot game state may be made different depending on which image is displayed.

As mentioned above, in the latter stage performance, the lines spoken by the character are displayed in the display area of the image display device 5 as character image 029SG008, and the lines are output as audio information from speakers 8L, 8R. The character image 029SG008 displayed at this time has fewer characters than the character image 029SG007 displayed in the former stage performance, but each character is larger and brighter than the character image 029SG007 (see Figure 11-10).

As shown in FIG. 11-55(F), after the latter stage performance is completed, the movable body performance is executed. In this movable body performance, the movable body 32 falls from the origin position, which is located above the image display device 5, to a performance position overlapping with the approximate center position on the front side of the display area of the image display device 5. The movable body 32 that has fallen to the performance position is moved back to the origin position by the drive of a drive motor (not shown) or the like.

After the movable body performance ends, as shown in FIG. 11-55 (G), a reach performance according to each variation pattern (if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach η variation pattern, then a reach performance F; if the variable display is a variable display with a Super Reach κ variation pattern, then a reach performance I) is executed.

Next, the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern will be described. As shown in Figures 11-56(A) to 11-56(D), in the variable display in the Super Reach λ fluctuation pattern, first, when the variable display starts, the meter 029SG005M increases all at once to the fifth stage and becomes full at the second timing before the reach. Next, a caption image 029SG005T is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 to inform the player that the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth stage (becomes full) and to inform the player that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

Then, the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed without a reach occurring or any of the reach performances A to D being executed. The presentation mode of the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is the same as the presentation mode described above in FIG. 11-55. After the high expectation reach performance development notification effect is executed, as shown in FIG. 11-53, reach performance I is executed and it is finally announced that the variable display result is a miss or a jackpot.

As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with this characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance, and the length L11 of the period from when the reach performance E development notification performance starts until the reach performance E is executed and the variable display result of the reach performance E is notified that it is a jackpot as a result of the performance of the reach performance E is set to be longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance. Since the length of the period L12 until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is set shorter than the length of the period L13 from the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance until the reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach performance I, in the case where the reach performance E is executed after the execution of the reach performance E development suggestion performance, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest in the game due to an excessively long period until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot. Also, in the case where the reach performance I is executed after the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, it is possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the reach performance I until the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, thereby improving interest in the game.

As shown in FIG. 11-7, the length L2 of the execution period of reach performance B is set longer than the length L1 of the execution period of r-value performance A, so that the player can focus on reach performance B for a longer period than reach performance A, thereby increasing interest in the game. As shown in FIG. 11-7 to FIG. 11-9, unlike reach performance A, the reach performance B does not execute a development notification performance before the variable display result is notified as a performance result, so that even if the reach performance E development notification performance is not executed, it is possible to reliably draw the player's attention to whether or not the variable display result of the reach performance B will be notified that it is a jackpot.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, while reach performance A or reach performance B is being executed, a meter performance may be executed as a performance suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, so that the execution of the meter performance can arouse the player's anticipation that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a meter effect can be executed as an effect suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and instead of or in addition to the meter effect, the execution of a high expectation reach effect development notification effect may be suggested by the output mode of the sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light emission mode of the game effect lamp 9, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, a form in which the meter performance can be executed only when the reach performance A or the reach performance B is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance can also be executed when the reach performance C or the reach performance D is executed. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ in which the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed from the middle of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and the reach performance I are executed, a case may be provided in which the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage (changes to a display mode that notifies the execution of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance) in response to the pre-performance or the premonition performance. In this way, the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach ι and the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ can draw the player's attention to whether the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage during the execution of the pre-performance or the premonition performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-9 and 11-25, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach λ, the meter 029SG005M increases to the fifth stage at once at the second timing without going through the execution of reach performance A, and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed. Therefore, even if reach performance A is not executed, the player can be drawn to the fact that the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are being executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, this feature section 029SG illustrates an example in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are not executed when reach performance B is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there may be cases in which the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I are executed after reach performance B is executed. By doing this, even when reach performance B is executed, the player can be made to pay attention to whether or not the high expectation reach performance development notification effect and reach performance I will be executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this characteristic part 029SG, the meter 029SG005M is shown to increase by one step at each of the first to fifth timings as an example of the meter performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may increase by two or more steps at any timing. Furthermore, when the meter 029SG005M is increased by two or more steps at any of the first to fifth timings, the rate at which the meter 029SG005M progresses to reach performance I may differ between the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step before the start of reach performance A or reach performance B and the case where the meter 029SG005M has increased to the fifth step after the start of reach performance A or reach performance B. In addition, in this feature 029SG, the meter performance is exemplified as a form in which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter performance may be such that the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed in four stages or less or six stages or more.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-8 and 11-9, the length of the period L13 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance I is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance I is set to be longer than the length of the period L12 from when the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is started until reach performance F is executed and the variable display result is notified of a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance F. Therefore, by lengthening the period until the performance result is notified when reach performance I with a higher expectation of a jackpot is executed, the sense of expectation of being controlled in a jackpot game state can be effectively increased.

Also, as shown in Figures 11-23 to 11-25, the meter performance suggesting the execution of a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance in this feature part 029SG is a performance in which the display mode changes in stages over a maximum of five stages (six stages if the state in which the meter performance is not executed is included) from the first timing to the fifth timing of the variable display. On the other hand, as shown in Figure 11-45, the reach performance E development suggestion performance suggesting the execution of reach performance E in this feature part 029SG is a performance in which the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes over two stages. In other words, in this feature part 029SG, as a meter performance, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can change up to five stages, but as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only change up to two stages. For this reason, in meter effects, the image of the effect target (meter 029SG005M) is more likely to change to the fifth stage than in reach effect E development suggestion effects, so the player can pay attention to whether the meter 029SG005M will increase to the fifth stage, increasing interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, the display mode of the meter 029SG005M can be changed up to five stages as a meter performance, while the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can only be changed up to two stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance. In this way, when the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 can be changed up to five stages as a reach performance E development suggestion performance, the rate at which the display mode of the reach performance E development suggestion image 029SG170 changes up to the fifth stage can be set lower than the rate at which the display mode of the meter 029SG005M changes up to the fifth stage.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9, in the variable display with the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach δ and Super Reach ζ, the length L5 of the period during which the meter performance can be executed is set longer than the length L6a of the period during which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, so that it is possible to suggest for a longer period that a reach performance F with a higher expectation of a jackpot than a reach performance A will be executed after the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed, compared to the execution of a reach performance E development notification performance being suggested, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example is given in which the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed is set to be longer than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the length L5 of the period in which the meter performance can be executed may be set to be shorter than the length L6a of the period in which the reach performance E development suggestion performance can be executed.

In addition, this characteristic part 029SG illustrates an example of a form in which the meter 029SG005M can be displayed on the image display device 5 even when it is not determined that a meter performance is to be performed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 only when it is determined that a meter performance is to be performed. Furthermore, the meter 029SG005M may be displayed on the image display device 5 for the first time at the timing of the first stage increase.

Furthermore, since the reach effect E development suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the result of the reach effect B, by executing the reach effect E development suggestion effect while the reach effect B is being executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the player's interest in the game due to the player realizing that the variable display result is not notified as a jackpot as the result of the reach effect B.

Note that in this feature part 029SG, the only pattern disclosed as a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E is a pattern in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed after a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B (see FIG. 1-8 (F)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a pattern for progressing from reach performance B to reach performance E may also be provided in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B. In this way, when providing a case in which a reach performance E development notification performance and a reach performance E are executed before a variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance B, a reach performance E development suggestion performance may be executed while the reach performance B is being executed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-31 to 11-34, while reach effects A to F are being executed, chance up effects can be executed, and the probability of winning varies depending on which effect pattern the chance up effect is executed in.

In particular, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which reach performance F is executed after reach performance A, during the execution of reach performance A, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, whereas during the execution of reach performance F, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the image display of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, the number of times the performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed is increased during the execution of reach performance F compared to during the execution of reach performance A, which makes it possible to appropriately draw the player's attention to the performance result of reach performance F.

Furthermore, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, in which reach performance E is executed after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as a chance-up performance. For this reason, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, the number of performances constituting the chance-up performance are executed less frequently during the execution of reach performance E than during the execution of reach performance B, which prevents the player from paying excessive attention to the performance result of reach performance E, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, during the execution of reach performance B, it is possible to execute a total of three performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, and the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, whereas during the execution of reach performance E, it is possible to execute a total of two performances constituting the chance-up performance, including the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32, as the chance-up performance. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach ζ, which executes reach performance E after the execution of reach performance B, it is also possible to execute the same number of performances constituting the chance-up performance during the execution of reach performance B as during the execution of reach performance E.

In this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects constituting the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image, but the present invention is not limited to these. For example, the effects constituting the chance-up effect may include the illumination of the game effect lamp 9 in a specific pattern, the output of a specific sound from the speakers 8L and 8R, the illumination of the light guide plate, the display of a light guide plate (pseudo light guide plate) on the image display device 5, the operation of the image display device 5 itself, etc.

In addition, in this characteristic section 029SG, examples of the effects that make up the chance-up effect include the red display of the reach title, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of the image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompt image, all of which are effects that are executed regardless of the player's operation (active effects). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the effects that make up the chance-up effect may include effects that are executed only when the player operates an operation means such as the push button 31B or stick controller 31A to change the light color of the game effect lamp 9 (the so-called back button) (active effects) that are executed only when the player operates the operation means.

As shown in Fig. 11-7 to Fig. 11-9 and Fig. 11-30, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, the reach performance of the Super Reach to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance C. If the pre-performance and the premonition performance are executed and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed before the variable display result is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance I is executed, and if the reach performance G development notification performance is executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the reach performance G, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed.

Furthermore, before the variable display result is announced as the result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the pre-performance and premonition performances are executed, and when the reach performance H development announcement performance is executed, the reach performance H, which has a lower expectation of a jackpot than the reach performance I, is executed, so that the performances can be diversified by combining the types of reach performances and the development announcement performances.

In particular, for the variable display of the variation patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, by determining whether to execute reach performance C or reach performance D at the ratios shown in Figures 11-30 (A) and 11-30 (B), the ratio of the reach performance I (high expectation reach performance development notification performance) being executed after the premonition performance is executed is set higher when the execution of reach performance C is decided than when the execution of reach performance D is decided, so that a predetermined relationship can be established between the executed reach performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, thereby increasing the interest in the reach performance and the development notification performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, in the variable display of the variable patterns of Super Reach γ, Super Reach ε, Super Reach θ, Super Reach ι, and Super Reach κ, an example is given of a form in which the reach performance to be executed can be determined from reach performance C and reach performance D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a variable pattern in which reach performance C is executed during the variable display and a variable pattern in which reach performance D is executed during the variable display may be provided separately.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, whether or not a chance-up effect is executed and the effect pattern are determined at different rates depending on the variable display result. In other words, the example shows a form in which the chance-up effect is executed as an effect that suggests that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the effect result of the reach effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance-up effect that can be executed during the effect period of reach effect A to reach effect D may be executed as an effect that suggests that any of reach effect E to reach effect I will be executed (developing into any of reach effect E to reach effect I).

Furthermore, as a chance-up effect, in addition to the variable display result being a jackpot and one of reach effects E to I being executed, it may also be possible to indicate that the number of rounds of the jackpot game when the variable display result is a jackpot will be 10 rounds, that the game will be controlled to a high probability state after the jackpot game ends, etc.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-9, in the case where a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, and in the case where a reach performance H development notification performance is executed after a reach performance C or a reach performance D is executed, a common pre-performance can be executed in the period between the reach performance C or the reach performance D and the development notification performance. By executing the pre-performance, the player's attention to the development notification performance can be increased, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether the high expectation reach performance development notification performance or the reach performance H development notification performance will be executed as the development notification performance, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, as shown in Figures 11-7 to 11-9 and Figures 11-27 to 11-28, during the execution period of reach performance C or reach performance D, it is possible to execute a branch destination suggestion effect that suggests whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed after the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D, and that can suggest the execution of both a reach performance H development announcement effect and a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect. Therefore, by executing the development destination suggestion effect, the player's attention can be increased to the execution of the development announcement effect, while the player's attention can be drawn to whether a reach performance H development announcement effect or a high expectation reach performance development announcement effect will be executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this feature part 029SG, an example has been given of a form in which it is possible to suggest that a reach performance H development notification performance will be executed and that a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to suggest that a reach performance G development notification performance will be executed as a development suggestion performance.

In addition, in this feature section 029SG, an example is given of a form in which a development suggestion effect can be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect C or reach effect C, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a development suggestion effect can also be executed by a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect A or a variable display of a variable pattern that executes reach effect B.

As shown in FIG. 11-30(D), for the variation pattern of Super Reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance development notification effect and a reach performance I are executed before the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, and the variation pattern of Super Reach θ in which a reach performance G development notification effect and a reach performance G are executed after the performance result is notified as a reach performance C or a reach performance D, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which the reach performance C is executed and the rate at which the reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the variable display of the Super Reach κ is 6. 0%, whereas the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed is 40%, so depending on whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, it becomes possible to guess whether reach performance I is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach κ, or whether reach performance H is executed in the variable display of the variable pattern of the super reach θ, and therefore it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In this characteristic part 029SG, for the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern and the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern, when the variable display result is a jackpot, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern is set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the variable display result is a miss, the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach θ fluctuation pattern may be set to be smaller than the difference between the rate at which reach performance C is executed and the rate at which reach performance D is executed in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

Although the embodiments of the present invention have been described above with reference to the drawings, the specific configuration is not limited to these embodiments, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

For example, the characteristic part 029SG exemplifies a form in which a first pending memory display area 029SG005D and a second pending memory display area 029SG005U are provided at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, which are capable of displaying a pending memory display, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-1, as shown in FIG. 11-57, an active display area 029SG005F may be provided at a predetermined position of the display area of the image display device 5 (for example, the center of the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5) in which a pending memory display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed can be displayed as an active display.

In addition, when the active display can be displayed in this manner, multiple display modes of the active display can be provided, as in the above-mentioned look-ahead preview performance, and an active display performance can be executed in which the probability of winning varies depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in. For example, three types of display modes for the active display can be provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle, and the highest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a red circle display mode, and the lowest probability of winning can be set when the active display is displayed in a white circle display mode (potential of winning for display modes of the active display: red > blue > white).

Furthermore, the display mode of the active display may be changed from a white or blue circle to a red circle during variable display, and the change in the display mode of the active display to a red circle may indicate an increase in the likelihood of a jackpot for the variable display being executed.

In this way, when the display mode of the active display can be changed during the variable display, as shown in Figures 11-58 (A) and 11-58 (B), for the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of super reach ζ, in which the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of reach performance B and then reach performance E is executed, the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E is set to P1.

In addition, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach η, in which a high expectation reach development notification display is executed during the execution of reach performance A and then reach performance F is executed, the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A is P2, and the rate at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance F is P3.

In this case, P3, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance F is being executed, may be set higher than P1, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance E is being executed, or P2, which is the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle while reach performance A is being executed.

In this way, when a variable display is executed in the variation pattern of the super reach η (when reach performance A is executed and then reach performance F is executed), the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle before the start of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, reducing the risk of the player realizing in advance that reach performance F will be executed. Also, when reach performance E is executed and when reach performance F is executed, the display mode of the active display changes to a red circle at a higher rate in reach performance F, which has a higher expectation of a jackpot than reach performance E, so that the display mode of the active display can be changed to a red circle appropriately according to the expectation of a jackpot, improving interest in the game.

In addition, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, the rate P3 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance F is higher than the rate P2 at which the display form of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of the reach performance A. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-2, in the same manner as the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-1, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, during the execution of the reach performance F, The rate P3 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle may be set higher than the rate P2 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance A, and the rate P1 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance E in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach ζ may be set higher than the rate at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle during the execution of reach performance B.

In this way, by providing multiple modes as the active display mode and varying the likelihood of a jackpot depending on which display mode the active display is displayed in, it is possible to make the player more easily aware of the likelihood of a jackpot, and by changing the display mode of the active display to a red circle before the execution of the reach performance E development notification performance or the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, it is possible to reduce the risk of a decrease in interest in the game due to the player perceiving in advance that the likelihood of a jackpot is high.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, a variation pattern of the super reach λ is provided in which a high expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed and reach performance I is executed without going through reach performances such as reach performance A and reach performance B. As a modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach λ, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of reach performance I may be set higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of reach performance I. In this way, by changing the display mode of the active display from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the execution of reach performance I, it is possible to make the player more aware in advance that reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-3, in the variable display of the Super Reach λ variation pattern, the rate P5 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle before the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be higher than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I is set to be lower than the rate P6 at which the display mode of the active display changes from a white circle or a blue circle to a red circle after the start of the Reach performance I. By doing so, it is possible to create a situation in which the Reach performance I is executed without going through another Reach performance even though the display mode of the active display has not changed to a red circle, which gives the game an element of surprise and increases the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG and the modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, three types of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. The expected probability of a jackpot is different depending on which display mode the reserved memory display and active display are displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of display modes for the reserved memory display and active display may be only two types or four or more types.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified examples 029SG-1 to 029SG-3, the display mode of the active display can be changed while a reach performance is being executed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the timing of the change in the active display mode can include timing other than while a reach performance is being executed, for example, while a development suggestion performance or development notification performance is being executed, or the start timing of the variable display. Furthermore, if it is possible to execute a pseudo consecutive performance that includes a temporary stop and re-variable display of the decorative pattern during the variable display, the display mode of the active display can be changed at the timing of the temporary stop or re-variable display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, three types of display forms for the reserved memory display are provided: a white circle, a blue circle, and a red circle. An example is given of a form in which the expected probability of a jackpot varies depending on which display form the reserved memory display is displayed in. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-4, in addition to a circle, a triangle, a square, a star, etc. may be provided as the display form for the reserved memory table display, and it may be possible to suggest which of the reach effects E, F, G, H, or I the reserved memory display will develop into depending on which shape it is displayed in. In this case, when the CPU 103 executes the winning random number value judgment process and judges that the fluctuation pattern (fluctuation category) is a super reach, it further judges which of the Super Reach α to Super Reach λ the Super Reach fluctuation pattern is (which of Reach performance A to Reach performance I will execute during the variable display), and transmits a Super Reach fluctuation category command (a fluctuation category command including information on which Super Reach fluctuation pattern will be executed) according to the judgment to the performance control board 12. In this way, the performance control CPU 120 can determine the display mode of the reserved memory table display from a circle, triangle, square, star, etc. based on the Super Reach fluctuation category command received from the CPU 103. Also, since it is possible to draw the player's attention to the shape of the reserved memory display before the variable display begins, it is possible to increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given in which the shape of the reserved memory display can suggest a reach performance that will develop, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the color of the reserved memory display can suggest the likelihood of a jackpot, and the shape of the reserved memory display can further suggest a reach performance that will develop into a draw. In this way, it is possible to draw the player's attention to both the color and shape of the reserved memory display, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-4, an example is given of a form in which the shape of the pending memory display can suggest a future reach performance, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the reach performances that can suggest a future reach performance based on the shape of the pending memory display may be only some of reach performance E, reach performance F, reach performance G, reach performance H, and reach performance I (for example, only reach performance E and reach performance I).

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image can be displayed in red at the start of the reach effects A to F, but the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-5, as a chance-up effect, the characters of the reach title image displayed in black can be changed to red halfway through. In particular, when the characters of the reach title image are changed to red halfway through as a chance-up effect in this way, the display mode of the expectation image showing the expectation of a jackpot displayed together with the reach title image can be changed (for example, the number of stars displayed as the expectation image can be increased). In this way, the display mode of the expectation image changes as the color of the characters of the reach title image changes from black to red, so that attention to the expectation image can be increased, and the player can be made to accurately recognize the expectation of the reach effect to be executed.

In addition, in the feature part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-28, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at the same rate when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach κ, the presence or absence of a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect can be determined at different rates when the reach presentation of the super reach to be executed is reach presentation C and when it is reach presentation D.

Specifically, as shown in Figure 11-59 as modified example 029SG-6, in the variable display of the variable pattern of super reach κ in which a high expectation reach performance is executed before the variable display result is announced as reach performance C or reach performance D during execution of the reach performance C or reach performance D, if the reach performance to be executed is determined to be reach performance C, a decision is made to not execute the branch destination suggestion performance 15% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern X 30% of the time, to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Y 20% of the time, and to execute the branch destination suggestion performance using pattern Z 35% of the time. Also, in the variable display of the variation pattern of super reach κ, if the reach effect to be executed is determined to be reach effect D, the branch destination suggestion effect is determined not to be executed 10% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern X is determined to be executed 30% of the time, the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Y is determined to be executed 20% of the time, and the branch destination suggestion effect pattern Z is determined to be executed 40% of the time.

In particular, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher (the decision rate of not executing the branch destination suggestion performance is set lower) than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to appropriately suggest that a development notification performance such as a reach performance H development notification performance or a high expectation reach performance development notification performance will be executed while the variable display is being executed, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for branch destination suggestion performance pattern Z (a performance pattern suggesting the execution of a high expectation reach performance development notification performance) is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, so that it is possible to more appropriately suggest the execution of development notification performances such as the reach performance H development notification performance and the high expectation reach performance development notification performance during the execution of the variable display, thereby increasing interest in the game.

In addition, in variant example 029SG-6, when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance is set higher than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the execution of reach performance C is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern, the execution decision rate for pattern Z of the branch destination suggestion performance may be set lower than when the execution of reach performance D is determined in the variable display of the Super Reach κ fluctuation pattern.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-6, as shown in FIG. 11-59, in the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach κ, an example is given in which it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to determine whether or not to execute a branch destination suggestion effect and the presentation pattern of the branch destination suggestion effect at different rates when the reach presentation of the executed super reach is reach presentation C and reach presentation D for the variable display of the variation pattern of the super reach θ and super reach ι.

Moreover, in this modified example 029SG-6, a form is exemplified in which a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C (first advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) and a branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D (second advantageous outcome suggestion effect in invention 033SG) can be executed as effects of the same presentation type, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance C and the branch destination suggestion effect that can be executed during the execution of reach performance D can be executed as effects of different presentation types.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in Figs. 11-5 to 11-9, the reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of the reach performances E to I. In this example, a notification mode (first notification mode) is shown in which one of the reach performances A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As a modified example 029SG-7, in addition to the first notification mode, a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) may be provided in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as a result of the reach performance A to reach performance D, and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot.

In this way, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be the same as the percentage of the branch destination suggestion performance being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In this way, by executing reach effects A to D as the reach effects of the super reach, and providing a second notification mode as a notification mode in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach effects E to I, the player can be surprised by being notified that the variable display result is a jackpot despite the variable display result having initially been notified as a miss. Furthermore, because the process for deciding to execute the branch destination suggestion effect can be made common between when the performance result (variable display result) of executing reach effects C and D is notified in the first notification mode and when it is notified in the second notification mode, the amount of data required for this process can be reduced.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-7, when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, an example is given in which the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode is the same as the rate at which the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and a first notification mode and a second notification mode are provided as notification modes in which the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the first notification mode may be different from the percentage of the branch destination suggestion effect being executed in pattern Z when the performance result (variable display result) of reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the modified example 029SG-7, as for the notification mode in which reach performance A to reach performance D are executed as the reach performance of the super reach, and the variable display result is notified without progressing to any of reach performance E to reach performance I, a first notification mode in which any of these reach performances A to D is executed and the variable display result is notified, and a second notification mode in which the variable display result is notified as a miss as the performance result of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then the variable display result is notified as a jackpot, are exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as modified example 029SG-8, a form is exemplified in which reach performance C or reach performance D is executed and the variable display result is notified. is executed, and after it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance C or reach performance D is a miss, the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, and it is notified that the variable display result of the reach performance G is a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot (PB1-7)), the rate at which the chance up performance is executed during the variable display in the variable display of the super reach θ jackpot may be different from the rate at which the chance up performance is executed in the variable display where the performance result (variable display result) of the reach performance C or reach performance D is notified in the second notification mode. In this way, when the reach performance C or reach performance D is executed, the execution rate of the chance up performance can be made different depending on whether the reach performance G is executed before it is notified that the variable display result is a jackpot, thereby improving the interest in the game.

Furthermore, in this modified example, the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot is different from the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed during the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ jackpot may be the same as the percentage at which the chance up effect is executed in the variable display in which the performance result (variable display result) of the reach effect C or the reach effect D is notified in the second notification mode.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-27, a branch destination suggestion effect can be executed in a plurality of presentation patterns, and a form is exemplified in which the rate at which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed varies depending on which presentation pattern is used to execute the branch destination suggestion effect. In particular, in the characteristic part 029SG, a form in which a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z is exemplified as a form in which a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect is executed with the highest rate, but the present invention is not limited to this, and when a branch destination suggestion effect is executed in presentation pattern Z, a high expectation reach presentation development notification effect may be executed with an extremely high rate (for example, 99%).

In particular, in the case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed with an extremely high probability when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, it is possible to provide a case where the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed even though the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in performance pattern Z, or a case where a reach performance I is executed even though a high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is not executed (a so-called performance contradiction pattern). Note that, when providing such a performance contradiction pattern, by executing the branch destination suggestion performance or reach performance I in performance pattern Z in the performance contradiction pattern only when the variable display result is notified that it is a jackpot, it is possible to give the player a sense of surprise, and when the branch destination suggestion performance is executed in pattern Z or when the reach performance I is executed, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether or not the high-expectation reach performance development notification performance is executed, thereby increasing the interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and reach performance G are executed, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are different, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variable pattern of super reach θ, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may be the same. By doing so, in both cases where reach performance C is executed and where reach performance D is executed, the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, which can increase the interest in the game.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-10, for the variable display in the variation pattern of super reach θ, an embodiment in which the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are the same is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both cases in which reach performance C is executed and in which reach performance D is executed, as long as it is possible to achieve an effect in which the player can expect that the reach performance development notification performance will be executed after the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of reach performance C or reach performance D, the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, i.e., the execution decision ratio of reach performance C and the execution decision ratio of reach performance D are approximately the same).

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-30, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ in which the variable display result (miss) is notified as the performance result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D, and then the reach performance G development notification performance and the reach performance G are executed, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided is smaller than the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided may be the same. In this way, in both the case where the reach performance C is executed and the case where the reach performance is executed, when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-11, for the variable display in the variation pattern of the super reach θ, the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance C is decided and the jackpot expectation degree when the execution of the reach performance D is decided are the same, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in both the cases where the reach performance C is executed and the reach performance is executed, when the reach performance G development notification performance is executed, as long as it is possible to produce an effect that the player can expect that the variable display result will be a jackpot as the performance result of the reach performance G, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D may differ by a small difference (for example, the difference between the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D is about 1% to 5%, that is, the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance C and the jackpot expectation degree of the reach performance D are approximately the same).

In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-34, in the characteristic part 029SG, it is possible to execute the display of the reach title in red, the movement of the movable body 32, the display of the cut-in image 029SG200, and the display of an image of the stick controller 31A as an operation prompting image as the effects that constitute the chance-up effect, and an example has been given of a form in which the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 can be executed as a common effect in reach effects A to D that are executed before the reach effect E development announcement effect and the high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, and in reach effects E and reach effects F that are executed before the reach effect E development announcement effect and the high expectation reach effect development announcement effect, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as a modified example 029SG-12, the expectation of a jackpot may be made to differ depending on whether the common effect of the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 is executed in any of the reach effects A to F. This makes it possible to limit the increase in the number of effects that can be executed as chance-up effects (the number of effect patterns for chance-up effects), while drawing the player's attention to which reach effect the red display of the reach title and the movement of the movable body 32 are being executed during, thereby increasing the player's interest in the game.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, as shown in FIG. 11-34, an example is given in which the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether the variable display result is a jackpot or a miss, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the presence or absence of a chance up effect and the presentation pattern of the chance up effect can be determined at different rates depending on whether any of reach effects E to I is executed.

In particular, as shown in FIG. 11-60 as modified example 029SG-13, for the variation pattern of Super Reach κ in which the high expectation reach performance development notification performance and reach performance I are executed before the variable display result (miss) is announced as the performance result of Reach performance C or Reach performance D, it may be possible to determine whether or not to execute the chance up performance at different rates when the execution of Reach performance C is decided and when the execution of Reach performance D is decided. In particular, in the variable display of the variation pattern of Super Reach κ, when the execution of Reach performance D is decided, the execution of the chance up performance is decided at a higher rate than when the execution of Reach performance C is decided, so that when the execution of Reach performance D is decided, it is possible to clearly suggest to the player that the expectation of a jackpot is high, which can increase the interest in the game.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modified example 029SG-7, a form was exemplified in which a second notification mode (so-called revival mode) is provided in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the reach effects A to D, and then the variable display result is once notified that it is a jackpot. However, as the second notification mode, as shown in FIG. 11-61(A) as modified example 029SG-14, a revival mode may be executed in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss and then notifies that the variable display result is a jackpot between the timing when the variable display stops.

In particular, in the case where the revival performance is executed after the variable display result of reach performance A to reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss (when the variable display is executed in any one of the variable patterns of Super Reach α, Super Reach β, and Super Reach γ to result in a jackpot), as shown in Figures 11-61 (A) to 11-61 (C), the length L21 of the performance period of the revival performance is set to the start time of the reach performance E development suggestion performance when the variable display result of reach performance B is notified that the variable display result is a miss and then the reach performance E development notification performance, or reach performance E is executed (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of Super Reach ζ). By setting it shorter than the length of the period L22 from the start of the reaching performance E to the end of the reaching performance E (the variable display result notification timing), or the length of the period L23 from the start of the reaching performance G development suggestion effect to the end of the reaching performance G (the variable display result notification timing) when the reaching performance G development suggestion effect, the reaching performance G development notification effect, or the reaching performance G is executed after the variable display result of the reaching performance C or the reaching performance D is notified that it is a miss (when the variable display is executed with the variable display pattern of the super reach θ), it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the performance becoming redundant (L22>L21, L23>21).

Furthermore, as shown in Figures 11-61(A) to 11-61(C), by setting the length L21 of the presentation period of the revival presentation to be shorter than the length L32 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation E development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation E development notification presentation, or the length L33 of the period from the start timing of the reach presentation G development suggestion presentation to the end timing of the reach presentation G development notification presentation, it is possible to add a sense of surprise to the notification that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in this modified example 029SG-14, a form in which the variable display result is once notified that it is a miss as a result of the performance of reach performance A to reach performance D, and then a revival performance is executed is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a revival performance may also be executed when a high expectation reach performance development notification performance or reach performance F is executed during the execution of reach performance A (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach η and a jackpot is obtained), when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a reach performance H development notification performance, or a reach performance H is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach ι and a jackpot is obtained), or when a pre-performance, a precursor performance, a high expectation reach performance development notification performance, or a reach performance I is executed during the execution of reach performance C or reach performance D (when a variable display is executed in the variable pattern of super reach κ and a jackpot is obtained).

As shown in the characteristic part 029SG, the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance A to reach performance D are executed (the probability of a jackpot being expected) is set lower than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, or reach performance I are executed, so that in the case where the variable display result is a jackpot, the probability of a revival performance being executed after the variable display result of reach performance A to reach performance D is notified that the variable display result is a miss can be set higher than the probability of a jackpot being obtained when reach performance F, reach performance G, or reach performance I is executed, so that the player can be made to pay attention to the revival performance being executed even when reach performance A to reach performance D is executed and the variable display result is notified that the variable display result is a miss.

In addition, in the case where the variable display result of the reach performance B is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development suggestion performance, the reach performance E development notification performance, and the reach performance E are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ to result in a jackpot), or when the variable display result of the reach performance C or the reach performance D is once notified that it is a miss as a performance result, then the reach performance G development suggestion performance, the reach performance G development notification performance, and the reach performance G are executed to result in a jackpot (when the variable display is executed in the variable pattern of the super reach θ to result in a jackpot), a revival performance may be executed, but in these cases of the super reach ζ and the super reach When the variable display is executed in the θ variation pattern, it is notified once before the revival performance that the variable display result will be a miss. Therefore, in order to prevent the presentation from becoming redundant and reducing interest in the game due to the variable display result of the reach performance being notified twice or more, the revival performance may not be executed when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach ζ or Super Reach θ variation pattern and a jackpot is reached, or the revival performance may be executed at a lower rate than when the variable display is executed in the Super Reach α to Super Reach γ, Super Reach η, Super Reach ι, or Super Reach κ variation pattern and a jackpot is reached.

In addition, in the characteristic section 029SG, an example was given of a form in which the time-saving state can be controlled after the end of a jackpot game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the time-saving state can also be controlled when the number of times the variable display is executed reaches a specific number (e.g., 900 times), or when the variable display result is a miss, the time-saving state can also be controlled when a partial miss is derived and displayed.

In particular, in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the derivation display of some losses, a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect shown in the characteristic part 029SG or a notification effect that notifies the player that the time-saving state will be controlled after the revival effect shown in the modified example 029SG-14 is executed may be executed. In this way, in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the number of times the variable display is executed reaching a specific number, or in the case of controlling the time-saving state in response to the derivation display of some losses, the player can be made to pay attention to whether the time-saving state will be controlled by executing a high-expectation reach performance development notification effect or a revival effect, whether a notification that the variable display result is a jackpot will be announced, or whether a high-expectation reach performance such as reach performance I will be executed, thereby improving the interest in the game.

In addition, as characteristic part 029SG, a form in which both invention 029SG and invention 033SG are implemented is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to implement only one of invention 029SG and invention 033SG.

In addition, in the characteristic part 029SG, an example of the present invention being applied to a pachinko gaming machine 1 is given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention may also be applied to a slot machine.

The present invention is not limited to the above description. Furthermore, the specific configuration includes the above-mentioned embodiment and other examples described below, as well as modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

Furthermore, among the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described above, and the configurations shown in the embodiment and each modified example described below, all or part of the configurations may be combined in any manner.

The above-mentioned and hereinafter-described embodiments disclosed herein should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims, not by the above-mentioned and hereinafter-described descriptions, and is intended to include all modifications equivalent to and within the scope of the claims.

The gaming machine of the present invention may also be a gaming machine (e.g., pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to a favorable state (e.g., a jackpot gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and has a suggestion effect execution means (e.g., a multi-function peripheral) that can execute a plurality of suggestion effects, including a special suggestion effect (e.g., reach effect I) and a first suggestion effect (e.g., reach effect A), a second suggestion effect (e.g., reach effect B), a third suggestion effect (e.g., reach effect F), and a fourth suggestion effect (e.g., reach effect E), which have a lower expectation of being controlled to the favorable state than the special suggestion effect, as suggestion effects that suggest that the game will be controlled to the favorable state. 10), and a special development effect can be executed as a first development pattern before the result of the first suggestive effect is notified (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed from the execution of the reach effect A), and a special development effect different from the special development effect can be executed as a second development pattern after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled as a result of the second suggestive effect (for example, For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in a variable display in a variable pattern of a super reach ζ, a variable display result (miss) is once notified as a result of the reach performance B, and then a reach performance E development notification performance is executed. The present invention is provided with a development performance execution means (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 executes the variable display during performance process shown in FIG. 10), a display means capable of moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body capable of moving from the first position to the second position different from the first position, and a performance execution means capable of executing a performance, When the development effect execution means executes the first development pattern, the effect execution means is capable of executing the third suggestive effect having a higher expectation than the first suggestive effect after the special development effect is executed (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach η, a high expectation reach effect development notification effect is executed during the execution of reach effect A, and then a reach effect F is executed), and when the development effect execution means executes the second development pattern, the effect execution means is capable of executing the fourth suggestive effect after the special development effect is executed. (For example, as shown in FIG. 11-8, in the variable display in the variable pattern of the super reach ζ, the variable display result (miss) is once notified as the performance result of the reach performance B, and then the reach performance E development notification performance is executed, and then the reach performance E is executed), the performance period of the special development performance is longer than the performance period of the special development performance (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance is longer than the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance), and the special development performance is longer than the length L7 of the execution period of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance, and then the length L6b of the execution period of the reach performance E development notification performance). the first performance (for example, the blackout performance shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first information is visibly displayed, and a second performance (for example, the first performance shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the first information is visibly displayed, and a tertiary performance (for example, the second performance shown in FIG. 11-10 and FIG. 11-55) in which the second information is visibly displayed and which is more emphasized than the first information, and The period from the execution of the special development performance to the notification of the control to the advantageous state is shorter (for example, as shown in FIG. 11-8 and FIG. 11-9, the length L13 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance I (the notification timing of the variable display result) and the length L12 of the period from the start timing of the high expectation reach performance development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance F are shorter than the length L11 of the period from the start timing of the reach performance E development notification performance to the end timing of the reach performance E (the notification timing of the variable display result). a portion that is set longer than the first display position), the performance execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-movable body display performance that moves the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and a gaming machine in which the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance are executed by the performance execution means in a predetermined period of time is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state than a gaming machine in which the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance in the predetermined period of time.

With this configuration, when the fourth suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game caused by an excessively long period of time until control to an advantageous state is notified, and when the special suggestion effect is executed after the special development effect is executed, it is possible to preferably draw the player's attention to the special suggestion effect before control to an advantageous state is notified, thereby increasing interest in the game. In addition, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the moving body effect and the pseudo moving body display effect.

In other words, the length of the presentation period and the period from when the development presentation is executed until control to an advantageous state is notified vary depending on the type of development presentation, and the development presentation and the notification of control to an advantageous state are executed in a presentation period of appropriate length depending on the type of development presentation, which increases interest in the game, and also increases interest in the presentation because players will pay attention to the presentation when the pseudo moving body display presentation is executed in the hope that a moving body presentation will be executed. In other words, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can execute multiple types of development presentations in a presentation period of appropriate length when installed in an amusement facility, and that is likely to attract players' interest.

Furthermore, an example of a form of gaming machine that can increase the interest in playing through the development presentation and can draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body presentation and the pseudo-movable body display presentation is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player, and is equipped with a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position, a movable body that can be moved from the first position to a second position different from the first position, and a presentation execution means capable of executing a presentation, wherein the presentation execution means is capable of executing a pseudo-movable body display presentation that moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, and a movable body presentation that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position, and the gaming machine is more likely to be controlled to the advantageous state when the presentation execution means executes the movable body presentation and the pseudo-movable body display presentation during a specified period of time than when the presentation execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display presentation without executing the movable body presentation during the specified period of time. Below, we will explain one example of the form of these gaming machines as well as other examples.

(Feature 241SG form)
The gaming machine of form 1 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
Equipped with
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position and the direction in which the movable body moves from the first position to the second position are a common direction (for example, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are a common downward direction).
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, the movement amount L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the movement amount L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. See FIG. 12-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can produce an impressive effect that is faster than the movement of the movable body, giving the player a sense of surprise.

The gaming machine of form 2 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of displaying a pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion where the performance control CPU 120 can display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5) is provided,
The pseudo movable body display is a display simulating a movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that undergoes a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement when moved from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position corresponding to the first position to a second display position corresponding to the second position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vertically moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 on the image display device 5 between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position),
The pseudo-movable body display performs a recoil movement display of a specific amount of movement when it is moved from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion that performs a recoil movement display (bouncing display) of a specific amount of movement when the performance control CPU 120 moves the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position).
The specific movement amount is greater than the predetermined movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See FIG. 12-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 3 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position on the image display device 5);
A movable body that can be moved from a first position to a second position different from the first position (for example, a mounted movable body 32 that can be moved from an origin position to a performance position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A pseudo-movable body display performance in which the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position);
A movable body performance that moves the movable body from the first position to the second position (for example, a part where the performance control CPU 120 can move the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position);
It is possible to execute
When the performance execution means executes the movable body performance and the pseudo-movable body display performance during a predetermined period, the probability of being controlled to the advantageous state is higher than when the performance execution means executes the pseudo-movable body display performance without executing the movable body performance during the predetermined period (for example, during a variable display period of a pattern based on a fluctuation pattern of a super reach β or a super reach γ, when a development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and a development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. See FIG. 12-11).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of the movable body effect and the pseudo movable body display effect.

The gaming machine of form 4 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a part in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 on the image display device 5 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special suggestion effect (for example, a notice effect A that predicts the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot) that suggests that the pseudo-movable body display will be controlled to the advantageous state by being displayed;
A notification effect that notifies the player of advantageous content (for example, a development effect B that notifies the player of the development of a strong super reach effect);
A predetermined presentation (for example, a development suggestion presentation suggesting the possibility that a development presentation B will be executed) that is executed before the notification presentation and suggests that the notification presentation will be executed by displaying a notification-related image (for example, a character image Z310) related to the notification presentation;
It is possible to execute
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed in one of a plurality of modes (for example, patterns PS-1 to PS1-4) having different expectations of the execution of the notification performance,
The display means includes:
In the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, then moved from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 12-25 (C) to (F)),
In the predetermined performance, the pseudo movable body display is displayed at the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position (see Figs. 12-26(A) to (J), Fig. 12-27(A)),
Before executing the notification performance, when the pseudo-movable body display displayed at the second display position is made invisible, the notification-related image (e.g., character image Z310) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figs. 12-26(F) to (J), Fig. 12-27(A)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, in the special suggestion performance, the pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, whereas in the specified performance, the display of the notification-related image is prioritized over the pseudo-movable body display moving in the same way as a movable body, and the image is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion that the notification performance will be executed.

The gaming machine of form 5 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position, or a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position);
A performance execution means (e.g., a performance control CPU 120) capable of executing a performance;
Equipped with
The performance execution means includes:
A special effect that notifies the player that the game will be controlled to the advantageous state (for example, a deciding effect that notifies the player whether the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state);
A specific effect (for example, a development effect B that develops into a strong super reach effect and notifies the player that a deciding effect will be executed) that suggests that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed;
It is possible to execute
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then is hidden without being moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestive image suggesting the execution of the special performance (for example, the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51) can be displayed in a display area including the second display position (see Figures 12-27 (B) (D) to (F)),
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed in the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved and displayed from the second display position to the first display position, and then hidden (see Figures 12-30 (A) to (F)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, before a special effect is executed, the pseudo-movable body display is hidden without returning from the second display position to the first display position, prioritizing the display of the suggestive image over moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion that a special effect will be executed, while during the special effect, the pseudo-movable body display is moved in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of form 6 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game,
A display means capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to the first performance display position),
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position;
The pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 12-40(A) to 12-40(C));
In a display area including the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position, a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass is cracked and an image Z71A showing a plurality of glass fragments is scattered) can be displayed (see FIG. 12-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable object display can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image, making a good impression on the player.

The gaming machine of form 7 is
A gaming machine (e.g., a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
The display means is capable of displaying pseudo-movable body displays including a first pseudo-movable body display and a second pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from a first initial display position to a first performance display position, and a portion in which the image display device 5 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position),
The first pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position (see FIG. 12-16(B) );
The second pseudo movable body display can be moved from a first predetermined display position to a second predetermined display position different from the first predetermined display position (see FIG. 12-16(C) );
The display means includes:
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to an intermediate display position (e.g., a first intermediate display position) and then to the second display position (see FIGS. 12-40(A) to 12-40(C));
The first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position in the order of the first display position, the intermediate display position, and the second display position for each display frame (see FIGS. 12-40(A) to 12-40(C));
The speed of the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is different from the speed of the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position. See FIG. 12-40).
The proportion of the first pseudo movable body display being controlled to the advantageous state is different when the first pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position and when the second pseudo movable body display is moved from the first predetermined display position to the second predetermined display position (for example, in the preview performance B, when a pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or a pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or a pattern PBY-2 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the proportion of the second pseudo movable body display being controlled to the jackpot game state (the jackpot expectation degree) is different. See FIG. 12-10 and FIG. 12-20 (B)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display or the second pseudo-movable body display is displayed moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display and the second pseudo-movable body display have different rates of being controlled to an advantageous state by the difference in the speed of their moving display.

The gaming machine of aspect 8 is the gaming machine according to any one of aspects 1 to 7,
A movable body (e.g., a first non-mounted movable body M100) that can move from a first position (e.g., a first origin position) to a second position (e.g., a first performance position) different from the first position,
When the movable body is moved from the first position to the second position, a certain amount of recoil motion is performed (see FIG. 12-36 ).
When the pseudo movable body display is moved from the first display position to the second display position, a reaction movement display of a specific amount of movement is performed (see FIG. 12-36 ).
The specific movement amount is greater than the constant movement amount (for example, the movement amount L12 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L13 of the first recoil movement display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. See Figure 12-38).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo-movable body display makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of a movable body without having to mount a movable body, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the movable body moves to the second position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

A gaming machine according to a ninth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eighth aspects,
A movable body (e.g., a mounted movable body 32) that can move from a first position (e.g., an origin position) to a second position (e.g., a performance position) different from the first position,
A distance from the first display position to the second display position (e.g., a moving display distance L2) is longer than a distance from the first position to the second position (e.g., a moving distance L1) (see FIG. 12-16 );
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display moves faster and travels a longer distance than the movable body, providing a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

A gaming machine according to a tenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to ninth aspects,
The pseudo-movable body display includes a performance display unit (e.g., performance display unit Z100A, Z200A) and a mechanism display unit (e.g., mechanism display unit Z100B, Z200B),
In the movement display of the pseudo movable body display, the mechanism display unit reaches the second display position earlier than the performance display unit (see FIG. 12-36 (B1) (B2)),
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to an eleventh aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to tenth aspects,
The movement display of the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement display from the second display position to the first display position (for example, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2. See FIG. 12-37).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to a twelfth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to eleventh aspects,
A period during which the movable body moves between the first position and the second position includes a first period during which the speed increases and a second period during which the speed decreases (see FIG. 12-39(A) );
The moving display period of the pseudo movable object display does not include the first period and the second period (see FIG. 12-39(B) ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

A gaming machine according to a thirteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to twelfth aspects,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means is capable of illuminating the light-emitting display unit when the pseudo-movable body display is moved and displayed to the second display position (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed to the first performance position. See FIG. 12-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the pseudo movable object display that has been moved to the second display position.

A gaming machine according to a fourteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to thirteenth aspects,
The pseudo movable body display includes a light-emitting display unit (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
The display means does not cause the light-emitting display unit to emit light when the pseudo movable body display is being moved (see FIG. 12-31 ).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, by making the (incomplete) pseudo movable object display during the movement display less noticeable, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the presentation effect.

A gaming machine according to a fifteenth aspect is the gaming machine according to the thirteenth or fourteenth aspect,
The movable body includes a light-emitting unit capable of emitting light (e.g., light-emitting display units Z108A, Z208A to Z208E),
When the display means moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display to the second display position, the display means performs the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit in a manner common to the illumination of the light-emitting unit (the part in which the performance control CPU 120 executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle after moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position. See FIG. 12-31 (D)).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, the pseudo movable body display can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

A gaming machine according to a sixteenth aspect is a gaming machine according to any one of the first to seventeenth aspects,
The display means is capable of moving and displaying the pseudo-movable body display from a first special display position to a second special display position different from the first special display position (for example, a portion in which the performance control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from a second specific initial display position to a second intermediate performance display position or a second specific performance display position),
The direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first display position to the second display position is different from the direction in which the pseudo-movable body display moves from the first special display position to the second special display position (for example, the downward direction in which the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the preview performance A is different from the rightward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position in the preview performance B. See FIG. 12-33).
It is characterized by the following.
According to this feature, a single pseudo movable object display can be displayed moving from a number of display positions, providing the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

A gaming machine according to a seventeenth aspect is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to sixteenth aspects,
The display means is capable of, after moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display from the first display position to the second display position, moving and displaying the pseudo movable body display in a direction different from the direction in which the pseudo movable body display is moved and displayed from the first display position to the second display position (see FIG. 12-43 );
It is characterized by the following.
This feature makes it possible to provide the player with a surprising effect that would be difficult to achieve with a movable object.

(Explanation regarding characteristic portion 241SG)
Next, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG in this embodiment will be described with reference to Figures 12-1 to 12-40. In the following, the components similar to those of the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description, or components having similar functions but different shapes or positions, etc., will be denoted by the same reference numerals and detailed descriptions will be omitted, and the differences from the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description will be mainly described.

As shown in FIG. 12-1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG has a mounted movable body 32 that is slightly larger than the mounted movable body 32 shown in FIG. 1.

As shown in FIG. 12-2, a vibration motor 61 built into the stick controller 31A is connected to the performance control board 12, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of vibrating the stick controller 31A and the push button 31B. In addition, a button LED 62 built into the push button 31B is connected to the lamp control board 14, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of turning the button LED 62 on and off.

Figure 12-3 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the contents of a performance control command used in the pachinko gaming machine 1. The performance control command is, for example, two bytes in length, with the first byte indicating MODE (command classification) and the second byte indicating EXT (type of command). The first bit of the MODE data (bit 7) is always set to "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is set to "0". Note that the command format shown in Figure 12-3 (A) is only an example, and other command formats may be used. Also, in this example, the control command is composed of two control signals, but the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

In the example shown in FIG. 12-3(A), command 8001H is a first variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variable display start command that specifies the start of variable display in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is a variable pattern designation command that specifies the variable pattern (variable time (variable display time)) of the decorative symbols (also called performance symbols) that are variably displayed in the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the variable display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be any value that is set arbitrarily according to the contents of the instruction by the performance control command. In addition, in the variable pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the specified variable pattern, etc.

Command 8CXXH is a variable display result specification command, which is a presentation control command that specifies a variable display result such as a special pattern or a decorative pattern. In the variable display result specification command, different EXT data is set according to the result of the determination (predetermination result) of whether the variable display result (also called the variable display result) is a "miss", "big win", or "small win", and the result of the determination of which of several types of big wins the big win type will be if the variable display result is a "big win", as shown in FIG. 12-3 (B), for example.

For example, as shown in FIG. 12-3(B), in the variable display result designation command, command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a pre-determined result that the variable display result will be "miss". Command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot A". Command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot B". Command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command notifying the pre-determined result and jackpot type determination result that the variable display result will be "jackpot" and the jackpot type will be "variable jackpot C". Command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "jackpot" and the jackpot type is "non-variable jackpot" and the jackpot type determination result. Command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result specification command that notifies the predetermined result that the variable display result is "small jackpot".

Command 8F00H is a pattern determination command that specifies the stop (determination) of the change in the decorative patterns in each of the "left", "middle", and "right" decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. Command 95XXH is a game state designation command that specifies the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the game state designation command, different EXT data is set depending on the current game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. As a specific example, command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which neither time-saving control nor probability variable control is performed (low probability low base state, normal state), and command 9501H is a second game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control is performed but probability variable control is not performed (low probability high base state, time-saving state). In addition, command 9502H is a third game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which high probability bonus control is performed but time-saving control is not performed (high probability low base state, high probability bonus state without time-saving), and command 9503H is a fourth game state designation command corresponding to a game state in which time-saving control and high probability bonus control are both performed (high probability high base state, high probability bonus state with time-saving).

Command 9000 (H) is a presentation control command (initialization command: power-on command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. Command 9200 (H) is a presentation control command (power outage recovery command) that is sent when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is resumed after a temporary halt. When power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 100 sends a power outage recovery command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and sends an initialization command if not.

Command A0XXH is a start of jackpot command (also called a "fanfare command") that specifies the display of an effect image indicating the start of a jackpot or small jackpot game. Command A1XXH is a large prize opening open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening is in an open state during a jackpot game. Command A2XXH is a large prize opening post-open notification command that notifies the player that the large prize opening has changed from an open state to a closed state during a jackpot game. Command A3XXH is a end of jackpot command that specifies the display of an effect image at the end of a jackpot game or small jackpot game.

In the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result specification command may be set, so that different EXT data is set according to the pre-determined result and the result of the big win type determination. Alternatively, in the hit start specification command and hit end specification command, the correspondence between the pre-determined result and the big win type determination result and the EXT data set may be made different from the correspondence in the variable display result specification command. In the large prize opening notification command and the large prize opening after opening notification command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the number of rounds (for example, "1" to "10") executed in the normal opening big win state and the high-speed opening big win state described below.

Command B100H is a first start port entry designation command that notifies the first start condition for executing a special symbol game using a first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (first start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A being detected by the first start port switch 22A. Command B200H is a second start port entry designation command that notifies the second start condition for executing a special symbol game using a second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B has been established based on the occurrence of a start winning (second start winning) caused by a game ball passing through (entering) the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B being detected by the second start port switch 22B.

Command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command that notifies the first reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. Command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command that notifies the second reserved memory number so that the reserved memory number of special charts can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the first start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the first start port and the first start condition being satisfied. The second reserved memory number notification command is transmitted from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12 when the second start port entry designation command is transmitted based on, for example, the game ball passing (entering) the second start port and the second start condition being satisfied. In addition, the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command may be sent in response to the start of execution of the special game when either the first start condition or the second start condition is met (when the pending memory number is reduced).

Instead of the first pending memory number notification command and the second pending memory number notification command, a total pending memory number notification command that notifies the total pending memory number may be sent. In other words, the total pending memory number notification command may be used to notify an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number.

Command D100 is a customer waiting demo designation command for designating the execution of a customer waiting demo performance, and as described below, is a command sent by the demo display setting that is executed when neither the first reserved memory nor the second reserved memory exists in the normal processing of special symbols, and the customer waiting demo performance is executed when a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the customer waiting demo designation command is sent.

The commands shown in FIG. 12-3(A) are merely examples, and some of these commands may not be included, or different commands may be used instead of these commands, or different commands may be added to these commands. For example, a prize ball number notification command may be provided to enable the number of prize balls to be paid out based on the game ball's entry into each winning port to be specified, a gate passage notification command to notify that the game ball has passed through the passage gate 41, and a notification command to notify the remaining number of times that the special bonus control or time-saving control will be executed.

Figure 12-4 is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of random numbers counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in Figure 12-4, on the main board 11 side, the numerical data indicating each of the random number value MR1 for determining the special chart display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the type of jackpot, the random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, and the random number value MR4 for determining the normal chart display result are controlled so as to be countable. Note that random number values other than these may be used to enhance the gaming effect. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also called gaming random numbers.

The random number circuit 104 may count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 may count numerical data indicating some of the random number values MR1 to MR4 by updating various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting section set in the RAM 102, as described below.

The random number value MR1 for determining the special symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether or not to control the game state to a jackpot by treating the variable display result of a special symbol or the like in a special symbol game as a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "65536", for example. The random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type is a random number value used to determine the jackpot type as either "Probable jackpot A", "Probable jackpot B", "Probable jackpot C", or "Non-probable jackpot" when the variable display result is a "jackpot", and takes a value in the range of "1" to "100", for example.

The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variable display of special patterns and decorative patterns to one of several types prepared in advance, and can take a value in the range of "1" to "997", for example.

The random number value MR4 for determining the normal symbol display result is a random number value used to determine whether the variable display result in the normal symbol game by the normal symbol display device 20 is a "normal symbol hit" or a "normal symbol miss", and takes a value in the range of "3" to "13", for example.

Figure 12-5 (A) shows an example of the configuration of the special chart display result judgment table 1 stored in ROM 101. In this embodiment, a common special chart display result judgment table is used for the first special chart and the second special chart as the special chart display result judgment table, but the present invention is not limited to this, and separate special chart display result judgment tables may be used for the first special chart and the second special chart.

The special pattern display result determination table 1 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot" before a determined special pattern that is a variable display result is derived and displayed in a special pattern game using a first special pattern by the first special pattern display device 4A or a special pattern game using a second special pattern by the second special pattern display device 4B, based on a random number value MR1 for determining the special pattern display result.

In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, a numerical value (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is assigned to the special chart display result of "jackpot" or "miss" depending on whether the game state of the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state).

In the special chart display result judgment table 1, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a jackpot game state as a "jackpot". In the special chart display result judgment table 1 in this embodiment, when the game state is a probability variable state (high probability state), more judgment values are assigned to the special chart display result of a "jackpot" than when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state). As a result, in the probability variable state (high probability state) in which the probability variable control is performed in the pachinko game machine 1, the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state is higher (about 1/30 in this embodiment) than the probability of determining that the special chart display result is a "jackpot" and controlled to a jackpot game state when the game state is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state) (about 1/300 in this embodiment). That is, in the special chart display result judgment table 1, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a probability variable state (high probability state), the judgment data is assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control to a jackpot gaming state so that the probability of deciding to control to a jackpot gaming state is higher than when it is in a normal state or a time-saving state.

Also, FIG. 12-5(B) shows an example of the configuration of the special symbol display result judgment table 2 stored in the ROM 101. The special symbol display result judgment table 2 is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not to control the variable display result to a small win game state as a "small win" based on the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment before the determined special symbol that is the variable display result is derived and displayed in the special symbol game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A or the special symbol game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B. In the special symbol display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, regardless of whether the game state in the pachinko game machine 1 is a normal state or a time-saving state (low probability state), or a probability change state (high probability state), a number (judgment value) that is compared with the random number value MR1 for special symbol display result judgment is assigned to the special symbol display result of "small win".

In the special chart display result judgment table 2, the table data indicating the judgment value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for judging the special chart display result is judgment data assigned to the decision result of whether or not to control the special chart display result to a small win game state as a "small win". In the special chart display result judgment table 2 in this embodiment, the number of judgment values assigned to a "small win" differs between the first special chart special chart game and the second special chart game. Specifically, in the first special chart special chart game, a judgment value is assigned to a "small win", but in the second special chart special chart game, no judgment value is assigned to a "small win". Therefore, as described below, the variable display of the second special chart is executed with priority over the variable display of the first special chart, and in a high base state in which the time-saving control is executed, a win occurs in the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, and the variable display of the second special chart is executed frequently, so that "small wins" hardly occur. In a high base state in which game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, the occurrence of small wins in which many game balls cannot be obtained can be avoided, and a decrease in interest in the game can be prevented.

Figure 12-6 (A) shows an example of the configuration of a jackpot type determination table stored in ROM 101. The jackpot type determination table in this embodiment is a table that is referenced to determine the jackpot type as one of multiple types based on the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination when it is determined that the special symbol display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot game state is controlled. In the jackpot type determination table, a number (determination value) that is compared with the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination is assigned to multiple types of jackpot types such as "non-variable jackpot", "variable jackpot A", "variable jackpot B", and "variable jackpot C" depending on whether the special symbol that is variably displayed (variably displayed) in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B).

Now, the types of jackpots in this embodiment will be explained with reference to FIG. 12-6 (B). In this embodiment, the types of jackpots are set to "Probable variable jackpot A" and "Probable variable jackpot B", in which high probability control and time-saving control are executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, high base state; "Probable variable jackpot C", in which high probability control is executed but time-saving control is not executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a high probability, low base state; and "Non-probable variable jackpot", in which only time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state, and the game transitions to a low probability, high base state.

The jackpot game state by "probable jackpot A" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). On the other hand, the jackpot game state by "probable jackpot B" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 5 times (so-called 5 rounds). Also, the jackpot game state by "non-probable jackpot" is a normal opening jackpot in which the rounds that change the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player are repeated 10 times (so-called 10 rounds). Therefore, "probable jackpot A" may be called a 10-round (10R) probable jackpot, and "probable jackpot B" may be called a 5-round (5R) probable jackpot. Furthermore, in the jackpot game with "Probable jackpot C", the round that changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state that is advantageous to the player is repeated twice (so-called two rounds), and the opening period of the special variable winning ball device 7 in each round is shorter (for example, 0.1 seconds) than in other jackpot games, making it a high-speed opening jackpot. Note that, during jackpot games of any type, no probable jackpot control or time-saving control is executed.

Although not shown in the figure, the small win game state in this embodiment changes the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state, which is advantageous to the player, twice, and the opening time is the same as the opening period of the special big win C (0.1 seconds in this embodiment). After the small win game ends, the game state immediately before the small win game is carried over.

In other words, in this embodiment, when it is decided to have a "high probability jackpot C" or a "small jackpot", the variable display is executed in the same variable pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 12-7), and the chance eye is displayed as a variable display result. Furthermore, since the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, it is not possible to distinguish from these variable displays and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 whether it is a "high probability jackpot C" in which high probability control is executed, or a "small jackpot" in which the previous game state continues without high probability control. Therefore, after the end of the high probability jackpot C jackpot game or small jackpot game, it is possible to have the player continue playing while expecting that high probability control is being executed.

The high probability control and time-saving control executed after the end of the jackpot game state of the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B will continue to be executed until another jackpot occurs after the end of the jackpot game state. Therefore, if the jackpot that occurs again is the variable probability jackpot A or the variable probability jackpot B, the high probability control and time-saving control will be executed again after the end of the jackpot game state, resulting in a so-called consecutive jackpot state in which the jackpot game state occurs continuously without going through the normal state.

On the other hand, the time-saving control that is executed after the end of the jackpot game state due to a "non-variable jackpot" ends when a specified number of special game games (100 times in this embodiment) are played, or when the jackpot game state is reached before the specified number of special game games are played.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-6(A), the allocation of determination values to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot A", "Probable variable jackpot B", "Probable variable jackpot C", and "Non-probable variable jackpot" differs depending on whether the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart. In other words, when the variably displayed special chart is the first special chart, a predetermined range of determination values (values in the range of "81" to "100") are assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C" with fewer rounds, whereas when the variably displayed special chart is the second special chart, no determination value is assigned to the jackpot types "Probable variable jackpot B" and "Probable variable jackpot C". With this setting, the ratio of determining the jackpot type to "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" with fewer rounds can be made different between the case where the first start condition for starting a special game using the first special symbol by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied and the case where the jackpot type is determined to be one of the multiple types based on the second start condition for starting a special game using the second special symbol by the second special symbol display device 4B being satisfied. In particular, in a special game using the second special symbol, the jackpot type is not determined to be "probable jackpot B" or "probable jackpot C" and controlled to a normal opening jackpot state or a high-speed opening jackpot state with fewer rounds, so that, for example, in a game state where game balls are likely to enter the second start winning hole formed by the variable winning ball device 6B due to high opening control accompanying time reduction control, frequent occurrence of a jackpot state with fewer winning balls can be avoided, preventing a decline in game interest.

In the example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 12-6(A), the allocation of the determination value for the "non-probability variable" jackpot type is the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game, so the probability of a non-probability variable jackpot and the probability of a probability variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart game.

As described above, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot B" and "Probable Variable Jackpot C" differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and accordingly, the allocation of judgment values for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" also differs depending on whether it is the first special chart game or the second special chart, and for "Probable Variable Jackpot A" which has a larger number of rounds, it is set up so that it is easier to determine in the second special chart game than in the first special chart game.

In addition, even in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a predetermined range of judgment values different from that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C". For example, in the case of the special chart game of the second special chart, a smaller judgment value than that in the case of the special chart game of the first special chart may be assigned to the jackpot type of "Probable jackpot B" or "Probable jackpot C" compared to the case of the special chart game of the first special chart. Alternatively, regardless of whether it is a special chart game of the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined by referring to common table data.

Figure 12-6 shows the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance for the cases where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" and a "reach", and for the cases where the variable display result is a "jackpot" or a "small hit". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "non-reach" is called a non-reach variation pattern (also called a "non-reach miss variation pattern"), and the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss" and the variable display state of the decorative pattern is a "reach" is called a reach variation pattern (also called a "reach miss variation pattern"). The non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the miss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "miss". The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is a "jackpot" is called a jackpot variation pattern.

The jackpot fluctuation pattern and reach fluctuation pattern include a normal reach fluctuation pattern in which a normal reach reach performance is executed, and a super reach fluctuation pattern in which a super reach reach performance is executed. In this embodiment, only one type of normal reach fluctuation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple normal reach fluctuation patterns such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be provided, just like the super reach fluctuation pattern, and in this case, the jackpot expectation (jackpot reliability) of each normal reach fluctuation pattern such as normal reach α, normal reach β, ... may be different. In addition, although super reach α and super reach β are provided as super reach fluctuation patterns, the present invention is not limited to this, and the super reach fluctuation pattern may be only one type, just like the normal reach fluctuation pattern.

The variation pattern in this embodiment also includes a special winning variation pattern (PC1-1) that corresponds to the case where the variable display result is a "small win" or the variable display result is a "jackpot" and the jackpot type is a "high probability jackpot C."

As shown in FIG. 12-7, the special chart variable display time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach performance of the normal reach in this embodiment is executed is set to be shorter than that of the super reach variation pattern. In addition, among the super reach variation patterns, the variable display period of the super reach β and super reach γ variation patterns is set to be longer (60 seconds) than the variable display period of the super reach α variation pattern (50 seconds).

In addition, in this embodiment, as described later, instead of first determining the type of the fluctuation pattern, such as the non-reach type, normal reach type, super reach type, etc., and then determining the fluctuation pattern to be executed from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type, these fluctuation patterns are determined using only the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination without determining these types, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, in addition to the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination, a random number value for fluctuation pattern type determination may be provided, and the type of fluctuation pattern may be determined first from these random number values for fluctuation pattern type determination, and then the fluctuation pattern to be executed may be determined from the fluctuation patterns belonging to the determined type.

Figure 12-8 is an explanatory diagram of the method for determining the variation pattern in this embodiment. In this embodiment, the variation pattern determination table to be selected varies depending on the game state, the display result of the variable display to be executed, and the number of reserved memories.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 12-8(A), when the variable display result is a non-probability jackpot in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, when the variable display result is a probability jackpot A or probability jackpot B in the normal game state (low base state), the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 12-8(A), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, and PB1-3 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 497 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, and Super Reach β is more likely to be determined than Super Reach α, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is two or less, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table A is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-1 (non-reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 600 judgment values are assigned to PA1-1, 300 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is three, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-2 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table B.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 700 judgment values are assigned to PA1-2, 200 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In addition, in the normal game state (low base state), if the variable display result is "miss" and the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart is four, the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is selected, and the miss fluctuation pattern determination table C is used to determine the fluctuation pattern from PA1-3 (shortened fluctuation pattern of non-reach miss), PA2-1 (fluctuation pattern of normal reach miss), PA2-2 (fluctuation pattern of super reach α miss), and PA2-3 (fluctuation pattern of super reach β miss).

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table C, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-3, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 90 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3.

In this way, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss," based on the number of reserved memories of the variable special chart being 3 or 4, etc., the variable display is executed more frequently using a shortened variable pattern (PA1-2, PA1-3) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-miss variable pattern (PA1-1), making it possible to prevent the game from becoming protracted while shortening the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot.

Next, as shown in Figure 12-8 (B), when the variable display result in the high base state is a non-probable jackpot, jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (normal reach jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-2 (super reach α jackpot fluctuation pattern), PB1-3 (super reach β jackpot fluctuation pattern), and PB1-4 (super reach γ jackpot fluctuation pattern) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table A. Also, in the low base state, if the variable display result is a sure-win jackpot A or sure-win jackpot B, the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PB1-1 (fluctuation pattern of a normal reach jackpot), PB1-2 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach α jackpot), PB1-3 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach β jackpot), and PB1-4 (fluctuation pattern of a super reach γ jackpot) using the jackpot fluctuation pattern determination table B.

As shown in FIG. 12-8(B), the number of judgment values assigned to PB1-1, PB1-2, PB1-3, and PB1-4 differs between jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A and jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B. Specifically, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table A, 97 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 350 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 300 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 250 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. On the other hand, in jackpot fluctuation pattern judgment table B, 50 judgment values are assigned to PB1-1, 200 judgment values are assigned to PB1-2, 347 judgment values are assigned to PB1-3, and 400 judgment values are assigned to PB1-4. In other words, in this embodiment, when the variable display result is a sure-win A or a sure-win B, the fluctuation pattern is more likely to be determined as a Super Reach β or Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern than when the variable display result is a non-sure-win, making it possible to draw the player's attention to the fluctuation pattern in the variable display.

In addition, if the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, a special jackpot variation pattern determination table is selected, and the variation pattern is determined to be PC1-1 (special jackpot variation pattern) using the special jackpot variation pattern determination table. In other words, in this embodiment, the variable display is executed with the same variation pattern when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot, making it difficult for the player to determine from the variation pattern whether the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot C or a small jackpot.

In addition, if the variable display result is "miss" in the time-saving state (high base state), the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D is selected, and the fluctuation pattern is determined from PA1-4 (time-saving shortened fluctuation pattern for non-reach miss), PA2-1 (normal reach miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-2 (super reach α miss fluctuation pattern), PA2-3 (super reach β miss fluctuation pattern), and PA2-4 (super reach γ miss fluctuation pattern) using the miss fluctuation pattern determination table D.

Specifically, in the miss fluctuation pattern judgment table D, 800 judgment values are assigned to PA1-4, 100 judgment values are assigned to PA2-1, 80 judgment values are assigned to PA2-2, 10 judgment values are assigned to PA2-3, and 7 judgment values are assigned to PA2-4.

In other words, in this embodiment, if the variable display result is a "miss" in the high base state (time-saving state), the variable display is executed more frequently using the shortening variable pattern (PA1-4) in which the special chart variable display time is shorter than the normal non-reach miss variable pattern (PA1-1) due to the time-saving state, so it is possible to shorten the period until the next variable display result is a jackpot while preventing the game from becoming protracted. Note that the variable patterns PA2-4 and PB1-4 (Super Reach γ) are variable patterns that can only be executed in the high base state (time-saving state).

In this embodiment, the RAM 102 is provided with, for example, a game control data holding area as an area for holding various data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. The game control data holding area includes, for example, a first special chart reserve memory section, a second special chart reserve memory section, a regular chart reserve memory section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter setting section, and a game control buffer setting section.

The first special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the first special symbol in the first special symbol display device 4A) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the first special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) in the first start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number values MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number values MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the first start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number of memories reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the first special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the first special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The second special symbol reservation memory unit stores reservation data of a special symbol game (a special symbol game using the second special symbol in the second special symbol display device 4B) in which a game ball has passed (entered) through the second start winning port formed by the variable winning ball device 6B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred but has not yet started. As an example, the second special symbol reservation memory unit associates reservation numbers with the order of winning (the order of detection of the game ball) into the second start winning port, and stores, as reservation data, random number values MR1 for determining the special symbol display result, random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, and numerical data indicating random number value MR3 for determining the fluctuation pattern, which are extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc. based on the establishment of the second start condition when the game ball passes (enters), until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4"). The reserved data stored in the second special chart reserved memory unit thus indicates that the execution of the special chart game using the second special chart is on hold, and serves as reserved information that makes it possible to determine whether or not a jackpot will be reached based on the variable display result (special chart display result) in this special chart game.

The reserved information (first reserved information) based on the establishment of the first start condition by the game ball passing (entering) the first start winning port, and the reserved information (second reserved information) based on the establishment of the second start winning condition by the game ball passing (entering) the second start winning port may be stored in a common reserved memory unit in association with the reserved number. In this case, start port data indicating whether the game ball passed (entered) the first or second start winning port may be included in the reserved information and stored in association with the reserved number.

The regular symbol reserve memory unit stores reserved information for regular symbol games that have not yet been started by the regular symbol display device 20, even though the game ball that has passed through the passing gate 41 has been detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the regular symbol reserve memory unit associates the game balls with reserved numbers in the order in which they passed through the passing gate 41, and stores numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 for determining the regular symbol display result extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104, etc., based on the passage of the game ball, as reserved data, until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, "4").

The game control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated depending on the progress of the game on the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The game control timer setting unit is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of multiple types of timers.

The game control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit may be provided with a random counter for counting some or all of the game random numbers in a manner that allows the CPU 103 to update them by software.

In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random numbers not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating random numbers MR2 to MR4, are stored as random count values, and the numerical data indicating each random number is updated periodically or irregularly according to the execution of software by the CPU 103. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the updating operation of the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be for updating the random count value by performing a predetermined process such as scrambling or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data extracted from the random number circuit 104.

The game control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko game machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

The RAM 122 mounted on the performance control board 12 shown in FIG. 12-2 has a performance control data holding area that holds various data used to control performance operations. This performance control data holding area includes a performance control flag setting section, a performance control timer setting section, a performance control counter setting section, and a performance control buffer setting section.

The performance control flag setting unit is provided with multiple types of flags whose states can be updated according to performance operation states, such as the display state of the performance image on the screen of the image display device 5, and performance control commands sent from the main board 11. For example, the performance control flag setting unit stores data indicating the flag value and data indicating the on or off state for each of the multiple types of flags.

The performance control timer setting unit is provided with multiple types of timers that are used to control the progress of various performance operations, such as the display operation of a performance image on the screen of the image display device 5. For example, the performance control timer setting unit stores data indicating the timer values of each of the multiple types of timers.

The performance control counter setting unit is provided with multiple types of counters used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count values of each of the multiple types of counters.

The performance control buffer setting unit is provided with various buffers that temporarily store data used to control the progress of various performance operations. For example, the performance control buffer setting unit stores data indicating the buffer values for each of multiple types of buffers.

In this embodiment, data constituting a start winning reception command buffer in which entries capable of storing data such as a start winning designation command, a pattern designation command, a variable category command, and a reserved memory number notification command are set in association with buffer number 1-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the first special chart, buffer number 1-1 to buffer number 1-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the first special chart, buffer number 2-0 corresponding to the variable display during execution due to the reserved memory of the second special chart, and buffer number 2-1 to buffer number 2-4 corresponding to the reserved memory 1 to 4 of the second special chart are stored in a predetermined area of the performance control buffer setting section. When a start winning occurs at the first start winning port or the second start winning port, four commands, namely, a start winning designation command (first start winning port designation command or second start winning port designation command), a pattern designation command, a variable category designation command, and a reserved memory number notification command (first reserved memory number notification command or second reserved memory number notification command), are transmitted as one set from the main board 11 to the performance control board 12. The four commands that make up this set - the start port winning designation command, the pattern designation command, the variable category designation command, and the pending memory count notification command - are stored in the entry for the buffer number that corresponds to the start port winning designation command and the pending memory count notification command.

The contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 1-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the first special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "1-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "1-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended. Similarly, the contents of the storage area (entry) corresponding to buffer numbers 2-0 to 1-4 corresponding to the second special chart are shifted up one by one as described below when the start condition is met and the variable display of the top reserved memory (buffer number "2-1") is started, and the contents of buffer number "2-0" that stores the contents of the reserved memory for which the start condition is met are cleared in the special chart hit waiting process executed when the variable display is ended.

When a first start winning port is entered, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance stores the commands in the start winning port reception command buffer, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 1-1 to 1-4, and when a second start winning port is entered, starting from the top of the free entries (the entry with the lowest buffer number) among buffer numbers 2-1 to 2-4. When a start winning port is entered, the start winning port entry designation command through the reserved memory number notification command are sent in sequence. Therefore, when a command is received, the start winning port entry designation command, pattern designation command, variable category designation command, and reserved memory number notification command are stored in the storage areas corresponding to the end of the buffer numbers "1" to "4" corresponding to the first or second special pattern reserved memory, in that order.

Whenever the variable display of the decorative pattern starts, the commands stored in the start winning reception command buffer are deleted from the entry corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that just ended (the entry with buffer number "1-0" or "2-0"), and the contents of the entries corresponding to the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start (the entry corresponding to buffer number "1-1" or "2-1") and the contents of the entries after the reserved memory of the variable display that is about to start are shifted. For example, when the variable display of the decorative pattern of the first special pattern reserved memory ends, the commands stored in buffer number "1-0" are deleted, the commands stored in buffer number "1-1" are shifted to buffer number "1-0", the commands stored in the area corresponding to buffer number "1-2" are shifted to the area corresponding to buffer number "1-1", and the commands stored in the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-3" and "1-4" are shifted to the areas corresponding to buffer numbers "1-2" and "1-3". Therefore, buffer number "0" becomes the area (entry) for storing each command related to the pending memory that is variably displayed at that time.

(Super Reach performance)
Here, the effects during the super reach will be described with reference to Fig. 12-9. Fig. 12-9 is a diagram showing the execution periods of various effects during normal reaches and super reaches.

As shown in FIG. 12-9, in the variable display of decorative symbols based on a normal reach variation pattern or a super reach variation pattern, the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display and then performs a normal reach performance as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the normal reach display mode. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, after executing a normal reach performance, it performs a super reach performance (weak super reach performance or strong super reach performance) as a variable display performance based on the variable display mode being the super reach display mode, and ends the variable display of decorative symbols after the super reach performance ends.

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute preview presentation A or preview presentation B, which notifies the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, as a presentation different from the variable display presentation in a normal reach presentation in a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (super reach α, β, γ). The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute development presentation A, which notifies the player that a normal reach presentation in a super reach fluctuation pattern will develop into a weak super reach presentation (content advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a development suggestion presentation that suggests the possibility of executing a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player), and can execute a development presentation B that notifies the player that a weak super reach presentation in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ) will develop into a strong super reach presentation (content that is advantageous to the player).

The presentation control CPU 120 can also execute a deciding presentation that notifies the player that the variable display result will be a jackpot or a miss in the strong super reach presentation in the super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ).

In this way, in a normal reach miss variation pattern, the normal reach performance will not develop into a weak super reach performance, resulting in a jackpot or miss, in a super reach variation pattern (super reach α, β, γ), the normal reach performance will develop into a weak super reach performance, and in a super reach variation pattern (super reach β, γ), the weak super reach performance will develop into a strong super reach performance.

In other words, Super Reach α is a weak Super Reach with a higher expectation than a normal reach, and Super Reach β and γ are strong Super Reach with a higher expectation than a weak Super Reach (jackpot expectation: normal reach < Super Reach α < Super Reach β < Super Reach γ).

In addition, normal reaches and super reaches α, β, and γ may each have a different type of normal reach effect or super reach effect, or they may have a common or at least partially similar type of super reach effect. Also, the types of super reaches are not limited to the above three types, and may be one or two types, or four or more types.

In the feature section 241SG, in the above-mentioned preview performance A and preview performance B, development performance A and B, development suggestion performance, and deciding performance, it is possible to move the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, and to move and display the first pseudo movable body display and the second pseudo movable body display described below. Therefore, before explaining the specific content of each performance, the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display will be explained.

(Pachinko machine development process)
First, in order to understand the circumstances under which the above-mentioned mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display, and the second pseudo movable body display were mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be explained with reference to Fig. 12-12. Fig. 12-12 is an explanatory diagram showing the outline of the development flow of the pachinko gaming machine.

As shown in Figure 12-12, when development of a given pachinko gaming machine (such as pachinko gaming machine 1) begins, a proposal is first created that clearly defines what is to be communicated to gaming establishments and players, and what the developer wants them to feel (step 241SGS001). Specifically, the game content, highlights, specs, game flow, presentation configuration such as reaches, board configuration, movable bodies (structures), etc. of the machine are considered.

Next, based on the proposal, a prototype (first prototype, design mockup) of the board (game board), images and materials that allow for an image of variable displays, a spec confirmation sheet, etc. are created (step 241SGS002). At the stage when this prototype is created, for example, although it was planned to include multiple movable bodies, problems may arise that make it impossible to include multiple movable bodies (for example, lack of space due to interference with other movable bodies, cost, durability, etc.).

Next, images such as variable display and effects are created (step 241SGS003). Here, for the effect images, a pseudo-movable body display image is created that imitates the non-mounted movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be mounted due to the problem that arose in step 241SGS002. Note that since the movement display in the pseudo-movable body display has less impact than when the non-mounted movable body is moved, for example, the reaction display movement when the moving display is stopped and the speed of the moving display are often deformed (exaggerated or highlighted).

Then, a prototype (secondary prototype) of the game board (game board) including images of variable displays and effects is created, and the variable displays, core effects, and the operation of the movable bodies are checked (step 241SGS004). If there are no problems, a mold product of the game board (game board) is created (step 241SGS005).

In this way, by installing multiple movable bodies that can provide an impactful presentation to the player, the presentation effect can be further enhanced and the presentation can be diversified, but due to various problems such as those mentioned above, it is often difficult to actually install multiple bodies. Therefore, it is becoming common to use the movement display of a pseudo-movable body display that imitates the non-installed movable body, based on the design and movement of the movable body that could not be installed.

In the following, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 as the characteristic part 241SG, multiple movable bodies were planned to be mounted during the development stage, but due to the occurrence of various problems as described above, it was decided to mount one movable body (e.g., mounted movable body 32), and the mounting of the other movable bodies (e.g., first non-mounted movable body M100, second non-mounted movable body M200) was not decided and they were left unmounted, so it will be described as follows: instead of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200, a moving display of a first pseudo movable body display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 and a moving display of a second pseudo movable body display imitating the second non-mounted movable body M200 are adopted.

In the above, the pseudo-movable body display is exemplified as a form adopted as a substitute for the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 that were ultimately not mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and there are also cases where a movable body could be mounted but a pseudo-movable body display is used deliberately to diversify the presentation. It is also possible to use a pseudo-movable body display that imitates a movable body that is not planned to be mounted at the development stage (for example, a virtual movable body or a movable body that is mounted or planned to be mounted on another model).

(Mounted movable body 32)
The mounted movable body 32 will be described below with reference to Fig. 12-13. Fig. 12-13 (A) is a diagram showing a movement mode of the mounted movable body, and (B) is a diagram explaining a state in which the mounted movable body is lifted.

As shown in FIG. 12-13(A), the mounted movable body 32 is composed of a performance section 32A formed in a roughly trapezoidal shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section 32B. The left and right sides of the mechanism section 32B, which are extended from the performance section 32A to the left and right, respectively, are supported by drive mechanisms 201L, 201R arranged on the left and right sides of the image display device 5, allowing it to move vertically between an upper origin position (the origin position shown by a solid line in FIG. 12-13(A)) and a performance position below the origin position (the position shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. 12-13(A)). Note that the mechanism section 32B is a transmission member that transmits the power of the drive mechanisms 201L, 201R to the performance section 32A.

The driving mechanism 201L, 201R mainly includes a mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driving gear 203L, 203R fixed to the driving shaft of the mounted movable body motor 202L, 202R, a driven gear 204L, 204R meshing with the driving gear 203L, 203R, a vertically facing rotating shaft 205L, 205R with the driven gear 204L, 204R fixed to the lower end, a moving body 206L, 206R inserted into the rotating shaft 205L, 205R, a mounted movable body solenoid 207L, 207R capable of holding the mounted movable body 32 at the origin position, and a mounted movable body LED 208 (see FIG. 12-2) built into the performance unit 32A and capable of illuminating a light-emitting unit 208A consisting of the letter "X" (see FIG. 12-2).

The left and right ends (guided parts) of the mechanism 32B are inserted (guided) into the rotating shafts 205L and 205R so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and are retained in the origin position by being locked to the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R. When the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R are turned on while retained in the origin position and the locked state is released, the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position due to its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism 32B come into contact with the moving bodies 206L and 206R, restricting downward movement, so that the mounted movable body 32 stops at the performance position.

While a spiral groove 205A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotating shafts 205L and 205R, the moving bodies 206L and 206R have an engagement portion (not shown) formed on the inner periphery that can be engaged with the groove 205A, and the rotation around the rotating shafts 205L and 205R is restricted, so that the rotating shafts 205L and 205R are rotated forward and backward by the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R to move in the vertical direction. Therefore, the mounted movable body 32 can fall from the origin position to the performance position by its own weight, and after falling, as shown in FIG. 12-13(B), the mounted movable body motors 202L and 202R rotate the rotating shafts 205L and 205R to raise the moving bodies 206L and 206R, so that the moving bodies rise from the performance position to the origin position, and are held at the origin position by the mounted movable body solenoids 207L and 207R.

(First pseudo movable display and first non-mounted movable body)
Next, the first pseudo movable display and the first non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 12-14. Fig. 12-14 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display (A) and a diagram showing the movement mode of the first non-mounted movable body (B).

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 shown in FIG. 12-14(A) is an image that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in FIG. 12-14(B).

The first non-mounted movable body M100, which is not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, is composed of a performance section M100A formed in a roughly rectangular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front, and a mechanism section M100B. The left side of the mechanism section M100B, which extends leftward from the performance section M100A, is supported by a drive mechanism M101 located on the left side of the image display device 5, so that it can move vertically between a first origin position above (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in Figure 12-14 (B)) and a first performance position below the first origin position (the position shown by the solid line in Figure 12-14 (B)).

The drive mechanism M101 mainly comprises a movable body motor M102, a drive gear M103 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M102, a driven gear M104 meshing with the drive gear M103, a vertically oriented rotating shaft M105 with the driven gear M104 fixed to its lower end, a movable body solenoid M107 capable of holding the first non-mounted movable body M100 at the first origin position, a moving body M106 inserted into the rotating shaft M105, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) built into the performance section M100A and capable of illuminating a circular light-emitting section M108A when viewed from the front.

The performance unit M100A has striped decorations on the front and four performance movable parts M110A-M110D arranged around the light-emitting unit M108A, and can be changed between a first performance state (indicated by two-dot chain lines in Figure 12-14 (B)) in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D are close to each other, and a second performance state in which the performance movable parts M110A-M110D move radially away from the light-emitting unit M108A.

The first non-mounted movable body M100 is inserted (guided) in a vertically movable manner on the rotation axis M105 at the left end (guided part) of the mechanism M100B, and is held at the first origin position by being engaged with the movable body solenoid M107. When the movable body solenoid M107 is turned on while held at the first origin position and the engaged state is released, the first non-mounted movable body M100 falls from the first origin position under its own weight, and the left and right ends of the mechanism M100B come into contact with the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that the first non-mounted movable body M100 stops at the first performance position.

In addition, a spiral groove M105A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation axis M105, while a locking portion (not shown) that can be locked to the groove M105A is formed on the inner periphery of the moving body M106, and rotation around the rotation axis M105 is restricted, so that the moving body M106 can move up and down by rotating the rotation axis M105 forward and backward by the moving body motor M102. Therefore, the first non-mounted moving body M100 can fall from the first origin position to the first performance position by its own weight, and after falling, the moving body M106 rises from the first performance position to the first specific origin position by rotating the rotation axis M105 by the moving body motor M102 to raise the moving body M106, and is held at the first origin position by the moving body solenoid M107.

As shown in FIG. 12-14(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is an image that imitates the above-mentioned first non-mounted movable body M100, and has a performance display part Z100A corresponding to the performance part M100A, a mechanism display part Z100B corresponding to the mechanism part M100B, and a light-emitting display part Z108A corresponding to the light-emitting part M108A. The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position (see FIG. 12-16(B)), and is movable and displayed in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to a position different from the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to a position different from the first performance position (see FIG. 12-17(A)). Additionally, the performance section M100A has performance movable display sections Z110A-Z110D that correspond to the performance movable sections M110A-M110D, and can be changed between a first performance display state that corresponds to the first performance state, and a second performance display state that corresponds to the second performance state.

(Second pseudo movable display and second non-mounted movable body)
Next, the second pseudo movable display and the second non-mounted movable body will be described with reference to Fig. 12-15. Fig. 12-15 is a diagram showing the movement display mode of the second pseudo movable body display (A), and a diagram showing the movement mode of the second non-mounted movable body (B).

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 shown in Figure 12-15 (A) is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200 that was planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but was not mounted due to various circumstances, as shown in Figures 12-15 (B) and (C).

Note that, for the second non-mounted movable body M200, two mounting plans with different operating modes (for example, mounting plan 1 shown in FIG. 12-15(B) and mounting plan 2 shown in FIG. 12-15(C)) were devised at the beginning of development, but due to development reasons, it became impossible to mount the second non-mounted movable body itself, so the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 was made capable of executing a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 1, which will be described below, and a movement display corresponding to mounting plan 2.

As shown in Figures 12-15 (B) and (C), the second non-mounted movable body M200 not mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of a performance section M200A formed in a circular shape when viewed from the front and decorated on the front side, and a mechanism section M200B, and is incorporated into a first performance device (mounting plan 1: see Figure 12-15 (B)) in which the lower end of the mechanism section M100B is supported by a first drive mechanism M201A arranged below the image display device 5, and a second performance device (mounting plan 2: see Figure 12-15 (C)) in which the upper end of the mechanism section M100B is supported by a second drive mechanism M201B arranged above the image display device 5.

As shown in FIG. 12-15(B), the first drive mechanism M201A has a movable body motor (not shown) provided on the back side of the base member M202, a rotating body M203 rotated by the movable body motor (not shown), and a guide rail M204 that guides the performance unit M200A so that it can move up and down. One end of the mechanism unit M200B is supported so as to be rotatable around a rotation axis facing in the front-to-rear direction relative to the base member M202, and a long hole M206 is formed into which a connecting shaft M205 protruding from the peripheral portion on the front side of the rotating body M203 is slidably inserted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the first drive mechanism M201A can be moved vertically between a first specific origin position below (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 12-15(B)) and a first specific performance position above the first specific origin position (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 12-15(B)) by rotating the rotating body M203 by the movable body motor (not shown) and rotating the mechanism part M200B about the rotation axis.

The performance unit M200A also has a rotating unit M207 that is circular when viewed from the front, and a non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) that can illuminate multiple (e.g., five) light-emitting units M208A to M208E provided on the rotating unit M207. As the rotating unit M207 rotates, the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown) lights up, causing the light-emitting units M208A to M208E to emit light in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors).

As shown in FIG. 12-15(C), the second drive mechanism M201B mainly comprises a movable body motor M212, a drive gear M213 fixed to the drive shaft of the movable body motor M212, a driven gear M214 meshing with the drive gear M213, and a rotation shaft M215 facing left and right with the driven gear M214 fixed to its left end. A spiral groove M215A is formed on the outer periphery of the rotation shaft M215, while a mechanism part M200B extending upward from the performance part M200A has a locking part (not shown) formed on its inner periphery that can be locked into the groove M215A, and rotation around the rotation shaft M215 is restricted.

Therefore, the second non-mounted movable body M200 driven by the second drive mechanism M201B can be moved left and right between a second specific origin position on the left side (the origin position shown by the two-dot chain line in FIG. 12-15(C)) and a second specific performance position on the right side (the position shown by the solid line in FIG. 12-15(C)) by rotating the rotation shaft M215 forward and backward by the movable body motor M212, and can be stopped at a second intermediate performance position halfway between the second specific origin position and the second specific performance position.

As shown in FIG. 12-15(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is an image that imitates the second non-mounted movable body M200, and has a performance display section Z200A corresponding to the performance section M200A, a mechanism display section Z200B corresponding to the mechanism section M200B, a rotation display section Z207 corresponding to the rotation section M207, and light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E corresponding to the light-emitting sections M208A to M208E.

Incidentally, at the beginning of development, it was planned to install a full-color LED as the non-mounted movable body LED (not shown), but due to cost considerations, it may be necessary to install a single-color LED. However, by making it the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, it is possible to make the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E light up in multiple colors (e.g., seven colors) without considering the cost.

Then, it can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position (see FIG. 12-16(C)), and can be moved horizontally between a second specific initial display position corresponding to the second specific origin position and a second specific performance display position corresponding to the second specific performance position (see FIG. 12-17(B)).

Next, the movement mode of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display mode of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figures 12-16 and 12-17. Figure 12-16 is a diagram showing (A) the movable range of a non-mounted movable body, (B) the movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (C) the movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display. Figure 12-17 is a diagram showing (A) a specific movement display area of the first pseudo movable body display, and (B) a specific movement display area of the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 12-16(A), the mounted movable body 32 can be moved vertically between an origin position where the lower part of the performance unit 32A overlaps with the upper part of the display area of the image display device 5, and a performance position where the performance unit 32A and the mechanism unit 32B overlap at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the movement distance from the origin position to the performance position is L1.

As shown in FIG. 12-16 (B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved up and down between a first initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the lower center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is L2.

As shown in FIG. 12-17(A), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved vertically between a first specific initial display position where the upper part of the performance display unit Z100A is displayed at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z100A and the mechanism display unit Z100B are displayed at approximately the upper center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the specific moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L2A.

In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, like the first non-mounted movable body M100, can not only be displayed by moving vertically within a movable range between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position, but can also be displayed by moving vertically within a specific movable range between a second initial display position not corresponding to the first origin position and a second performance display position not corresponding to the first performance position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-16 (C), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved up and down between a first specific initial display position where the lower part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and a first specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position is L3.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-17 (B), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved left and right between a second specific initial display position where the right part of the performance display unit Z200A is displayed at the left position of the display area of the image display device 5, and a second specific performance display position where the performance display unit Z200A and the mechanism display unit Z200B are displayed at approximately the center position of the display area of the image display device 5, and the moving display distance from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position is L3A.

In this way, the second pseudo movable body display Z200, like the second non-mounted movable body M200, can not only be displayed by moving up and down within a movable range between a first specific initial display position corresponding to the first specific origin position and a first specific performance display position corresponding to the first specific performance position, but can also be displayed by moving left and right within a specific movable range between a second specific initial display position not corresponding to the first specific origin position and a second specific performance display position not corresponding to the first specific performance position.

Furthermore, the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3 of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is shorter than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32 (L2>L1>L3).Furthermore, the movement display distance L2A of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is longer than the movement distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, and the movement display distance L3A of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is longer than the movement distance L1 and the movement display distance L2A of the mounted movable body 32 (L3A>L2A>L1).

In this way, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be displayed moving over a longer distance (L2, L2A, L3A) than the moving distance L1 of the mounted movable body 32, making it possible to realize a more impactful presentation than the mounted movable body 32.

As shown in FIG. 12-16, the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 are composed of performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B are extended to the edge of the display area of the image display device 5, so that it appears as if the performance display units Z100A, Z200A are supported by the drive mechanism M101, first drive mechanism M201A, and second drive mechanism M201B arranged on the side of the image display device 5, making it possible to express the movement display more realistically.

In other words, a pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) is a display that imitates a movable body as a structure that can be operated by a drive mechanism, such as a movable body mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1, a non-mounted movable body, or a virtual movable body, and is different from an image that does not have a mechanism display section, such as the development notification image Z300 (see Figure 12-25 (H)).

In addition, it is sufficient if it is possible to display a part of the model movable body in a different display manner, or to display a manner that cannot be realized with the model movable body (for example, a deformed or transformed display), or to display movement (for example, a high-speed movement display).

The pseudo-movable body display (pseudo-movable body image) may be an image or video created by a computer or the like, or may be an image or video captured of a movable body as an actual structure. Furthermore, when these pseudo-movable body displays are displayed moving, a pseudo-impact can be generated by outputting sound effects that are the same as or similar to the sound effects output when the movable body is moved or the impact sound generated when the movable body is stopped, vibrating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A with the vibration motor 61 when the pseudo-movable body display reaches the performance display position, or by outputting deep bass sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc., thereby providing the player with a more realistic performance.

Next, the details of the various effects using the mounted movable body 32, the first pseudo movable body display Z100, and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 12-10. Figure 12-10 is a diagram for explaining the content and configuration of the various effects in the super reach.

(Preview performance A)
As shown in Figure 12-10, the preview performance A can be executed when the base state is low, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific performance display position, and then the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E light up in a color corresponding to the determined performance pattern, thereby indicating the possibility (expectation) of a jackpot.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is erased after being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 12-25 (C) to (F)).

In more detail, when pattern PYA-1 is determined in the preview performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278A described later, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white, when pattern PYA-2 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in blue, when pattern PYA-3 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in green, and when pattern PYA-4 is determined, the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red. Therefore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E with the highest expectation of a jackpot is red. The light-emitting color can be changed in various ways, and when a jackpot is confirmed, the light-emitting display units may be illuminated in gold or rainbow colors, etc.

(Preview Performance B)
The preview performance B is executable when the base state is high, and the possibility (expectation) that the variable display result will be a jackpot is indicated depending on whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position, or whether the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the first performance display position to the first initial display position (see Figures 12-34 (A) to (C)). The first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second performance display position to the second initial display position (see Figures 12-34 (D) to (F)).

The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 12-33 (A) to (C)). The second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position is erased without being moved and displayed from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position (see Figures 12-33 (D) to (F)).

In detail, in the preview performance B type determination process of step 241SGS278A described below, if pattern PYB-1 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position, if pattern PYB-2 is determined, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position, if pattern PYB-3 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and if pattern PYB-4 is determined, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the second initial display position to the second performance display position. Therefore, the probability of a jackpot is higher when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner than when the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed in a moving manner, and the moving display pattern with the highest probability of a jackpot is the pattern in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed in a moving manner from the second initial display position to the second performance display position.

Furthermore, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or from the second initial display position to the second performance display position faster than the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moves from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position or the second specific performance display position.

(Development A)
In the development performance A, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 moving (falling) from the origin position to the performance position (see FIG. 12-25 (H)). The mounted movable body 32, which has been moved from the origin position to the performance position, rises from the performance position to the origin position and returns after a predetermined time has passed.

In more detail, if execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, the development to a weak super reach is announced by the mounted movable body 32 dropping from the origin position to the performance position at the performance start timing (see FIG. 12-25 (H)). On the other hand, if non-execution is determined, the mounted movable body 32 does not drop from the origin position at the performance start timing, and the development to a weak super reach is announced by the display of a development announcement image Z300 on the image display device 5 (see FIG. 12-25 (G)). In other words, non-execution is determined in the development performance A type determination process, which means that a performance pattern is decided in which the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped and the development announcement image Z300 is displayed to announce the development to a weak super reach.

The development notification image Z300 is an image (display) that imitates the mounted movable body 32, but unlike pseudo-movable body displays such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which are displayed and move in the same way as the movable body, it is an image (display) that imitates only the performance section 32A, and is displayed in a display mode that differs from the movement of the mounted movable body 32. For example, at the performance start timing, it is displayed from the beginning at a performance display position that corresponds to the performance position of the mounted movable body 32, without any movement display.

(Development suggestion)
The development suggestion effect can be executed before the development effect B is executed, and after the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position and then moved to the first specific effect display position, when a rapid-fire operation of the push button 31B by the player (an operation in which the detection signal of the push sensor 35B is detected multiple times within a specified period) is detected during an effective operation period in which the rapid-fire operation is effective, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E change to an illuminated display color corresponding to the determined effect pattern, thereby suggesting the display color of the character image Z310 described below, i.e., the possibility that the development effect B will be executed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the effective operation period during which the repeated operation of the push button 31B in the development suggestion performance is valid, an operation promotion image (such as an image imitating the push button 31B) that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B is not displayed on the image display device 5, and instead the button LED 62 (see FIG. 12-2) built into the push button 31B is turned on to promote the repeated operation of the push button 31B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an operation promotion display that promotes the repeated operation of the push button 31B during the effective operation period may be displayed on the image display device 5.

In addition, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which has been moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, is displayed so that the character image Z310 related to the model overlaps (acts on) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position in the display area of the image display device 5, and then is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see Figures 12-26 (A) to (J), Figure 12-27 (A)).

In more detail, in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B described later, if pattern PS-1 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will remain white even if the push button 31B is repeatedly pressed, if pattern PS-2 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, if pattern PS-3 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B, and if pattern PS-4 is determined, the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E will change from white to blue to green to red in response to the repeated pressing of the push button 31B. Therefore, the final light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display parts Z208A to Z208E with the highest execution expectation of development performance B will be red.

The light color and the pattern of change in light color can also be changed in various ways. For example, the light color may change from white to red without changing to blue or green, or the light color may be other than white from the beginning. In addition, the number of lit light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E may be increased in response to repeated pressing of the push button 31B, so that a higher number of lit light-emitting parts increases the expectation of the development performance B being executed than a lower number of lit light-emitting parts. The expectation may also differ depending on the light color and the number of lights.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping is small, even if one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 is determined, the illumination color does not change depending on the amount of the repeated tapping operation. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the repeated tapping of the push button 31B is not detected during the valid operation period or the amount of the repeated tapping operation is small, the illumination color may change to the illumination color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 at the timing when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, the character image Z310 displayed after the valid operation period ends is displayed in a color that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the valid operation period ends.

In addition, different types of character images Z310 may be displayed depending on the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period ends. Even if the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E does not change despite the fact that one of the patterns PS-2 to 4 has been determined as described above, a character image Z310 (a color different from the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E) in a color corresponding to the determined pattern PS-2 to 4 may be displayed. Furthermore, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E may be changed to the same color as the character image Z310 at the timing when the character image Z310 is displayed.

(Development B)
In the development performance B, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, thereby informing the player that the performance will develop into a strong super reach performance and a deciding performance will be executed (content advantageous to the player) (see FIG. 12-27(D)). Also, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 that was moved and displayed at the first specific performance display position is erased without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 12-27(D) to (F)).

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, a reach title image Z51 is displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position so as to overlap the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in a manner indicating that the image is about to be displayed, thereby suggesting that the variable display result will be a jackpot (the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state).

In more detail, when execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS280 described later, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, thereby notifying the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 12-27 (D)). On the other hand, when non-execution is determined, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position at the performance start timing, and the image display device 5 displays the reach title image Z51 in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach (see FIG. 12-27 (C)). In other words, when non-execution is determined in the development performance B type determination process, a performance pattern is determined in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is not moved and the reach title image Z51 is displayed in a ready state to notify the development to a strong super reach.

(Decisive performance)
The deciding performance is a performance that concludes the battle between the ally character and the enemy character that has been executed in the super reach performance, and notifies the player of whether or not the game state is controlled to a jackpot. Specifically, for example, after a display is made in which the ally character deals a final blow to the enemy character, a display is made to prompt the player to operate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, and at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or at the timing when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is not detected and the operation effective period ends, either a jackpot confirmation notification is made in which the enemy character is defeated by moving the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, and the player wins the battle, or a loss confirmation notification is made in which the mounted movable body 32 is not moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the player is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle.

Patterns KB-1 and KV-1 are selected when the variable display result is a miss, and a confirmed miss notification is made in which the friendly character is defeated by the enemy character and loses the battle, while patterns KB-2 and KV-2 are selected when the variable display result is a jackpot, and a confirmed jackpot notification is made in which the friendly character defeats the enemy character and wins the battle.

In addition, in patterns KB-2 and KV-2, when the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is detected, or when the effective operation period ends without the operation of the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A being detected, the vibration motor 61 is driven for a predetermined period (e.g., about 10 seconds) to vibrate the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A.

In addition, if the execution of pattern KB-2 or KV-2 is determined in the determination effect type determination process of step 241SGS282 described later, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the effect position at the timing when the mounted movable body 32 falls, and a jackpot confirmation notification is made, and after returning from the effect position to the origin position, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first effect display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is resumed. Then, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first effect display position to the first initial display position and the variable display of the decorative pattern is stopped, and the variable display result is a jackpot (see Figures 12-29 (E) to (G), Figures 12-30 (A) to (F)).

On the other hand, if it is decided to execute pattern KB-1 or KV-1, the mounted movable body 32 will not move from the origin position at the timing when it falls, and an effect image Z57 of cracked glass will be displayed to notify the user of a confirmed miss, and the variable display result will be a miss (see Figures 12-29 (H) to (J)).

Next, the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 in super reach β and γ (strong super reach) and development performance B using the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained based on Figure 12-11. Figure 12-11 is a diagram showing the probability of winning depending on the execution status of development performance A and development performance B.

As shown in Figure 12-11, pattern A is a pattern in which both development effect A and development effect B are not executed during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of super reach β and γ (strong super reach), pattern B is a pattern in which development effect A is not executed and development effect B is executed, pattern C is a pattern in which development effect A is executed and development effect B is not executed, and pattern D is a pattern in which development effect A and development effect B are both executed.

In the above, the jackpot expectation is set in the order of pattern A < pattern B < pattern C < pattern D. In other words, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, when the development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and the development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance B is executed without executing the development performance A. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A is executed without executing the development performance B. Also, when the development performance A and the development performance B are executed, the probability of being controlled to the jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher than when the development performance A and the development performance B are not executed.

Figure 12-18 is a flow chart showing the variable display start setting process (step S171) in the performance control process shown in Figure 10. In the variable display start setting process, the performance control CPU 120 first determines whether the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271). If the first variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS271; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "1-0" to "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory in the start winning time reception command buffer are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS272). Note that the contents of buffer number "1-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-1" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-2" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-3" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "1-4" of the first special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "1-3".

Also, in step 241SGS271, if the first variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS271; N), it is determined whether the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273). If the second variable display start command reception flag is off (step 241SGS273; N), the variable display start setting process is terminated, and if the second variable display start command reception flag is on (step 241SGS273; Y), the various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers "2-0" to "2-4" of the second special chart reservation memory in the start winning time reception command buffer 109SG194A are shifted up by one buffer number (step 241SGS274). Note that the contents of buffer number "2-0" cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift to, so it is erased.

Specifically, the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-1" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-0", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-2" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-1", the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-3" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-2", and the various command data and flags stored in association with buffer number "2-4" of the second special chart reserved memory are shifted to be stored in association with buffer number "2-3".

After executing step 241SGS272 or step 241SGS274, the performance control CPU 120 reads the variation pattern designation command from the variation pattern designation command storage area (step 241SGS275).

Next, the display result (stopping pattern) of the decorative pattern is determined according to the data stored in the display result designation command storage area (i.e., the received display result designation command) (step 241SGS276). In this case, the performance control CPU 120 determines the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores data indicating the determined stopping pattern of the decorative pattern in the decorative pattern display result storage area.

In this feature section 241SG, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot A, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned to "7" as the stopping pattern. When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot B, the stopping pattern is determined from among multiple combinations of odd numbers other than "7" (for example, combinations of decorative patterns such as "111", "333", "555", and "999"). When the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability of a jackpot C, the stopping pattern is determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the small win. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to a non-probability jackpot, the performance control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of decorative patterns (jackpot patterns) in which three patterns are aligned as even numbers as the stopping patterns. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the sixth variable display result designation command corresponding to a small jackpot, the stopping patterns are determined from among "334" and "778", which are the same chance numbers as the probability jackpot C. In addition, when the received variable display result designation command is the first variable display result designation command corresponding to a miss, the stopping patterns are determined to be decorative patterns in which three patterns are not aligned, and are combinations other than the above-mentioned chance numbers (miss patterns).

When determining these stopping patterns, the performance control CPU 120 may, for example, extract a random number for determining the stopping pattern, and determine the stopping pattern of the decorative pattern using a stopping pattern determination table in which data indicating combinations of decorative patterns are associated with numerical values. In other words, the stopping pattern may be determined by selecting data indicating the combination of decorative patterns that corresponds to the numerical value that matches the extracted random number.

Then, the CPU 120 for controlling the performance checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277). If it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; Y), it executes the preview performance type determination process shown in FIG. 12-19 to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the preview performance A or the preview performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS278A), and executes the development performance A type determination process shown in FIG. 12-21 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance A in the variable display (step 241SGS278B). If it is not a normal reach fluctuation pattern or a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS277; N), it proceeds to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 12-19, in the preview performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS301). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the CPU 120 for controlling the effects determines whether the game state is in a low base state (time-saving state) (step 241SGS302), and if it is in a low base state (step 241SGS302; Y), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect A using table A for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 12-20 (A) (step 241SGS303). On the other hand, if it is not in a low base state, that is, if it is in a high base state (step 241SGS302; N), it extracts a random number for determining the advance notice effect and determines the effect pattern of advance notice effect B using table B for determining the type of advance notice effect shown in FIG. 12-20 (B) (step 241SGS304).

As shown in Figure 12-20 (A), in the table for determining the type of preview performance A, for each of "Pattern PYA-1", "Pattern PYA-2", "Pattern PYA-3", and "Pattern PYA-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 12-20 (A) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4". Additionally, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYA-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYA-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYA-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYA-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYA-4" > "Pattern PYA-3" > "Pattern PYA-2" > "Pattern PYA-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

As shown in Figure 12-20 (B), in the table for determining the type of preview performance B, for each of "Pattern PYB-1", "Pattern PYB-2", "Pattern PYB-3", and "Pattern PYB-4", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 12-20 (B) are obtained.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4". Furthermore, when the variable display result is a normal reach miss, 80 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-1," 10 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-2," 8 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-3," and 2 judgment values are assigned to "Pattern PYB-4."

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-4" is determined with the highest probability, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PYB-3" is determined with the highest probability, and if it results in a super reach miss or normal reach miss, "Pattern PYB-1" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, "Pattern PYB-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-3" > "Pattern PYB-2" > "Pattern PYB-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given in which the determination ratio of each pattern is the same in the table for determining the preview performance type A for a low base state and the table for determining the preview performance type B for a high base state, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the determination ratio of each pattern may be different in the table for determining the preview performance type A and the table for determining the preview performance type B.

Returning to FIG. 12-19, in step 241SGS305, the preview performance type determined in step 241SGS303 or step 241SGS304 is stored in a predetermined area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS305). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS306, where the preview performance start waiting timer is set to the period until the performance starts (step 241SGS306), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-21, in the development performance A type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS311). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small jackpot) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the development performance A is the normal reach and the super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of the probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the development performance A.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the type of advanced performance, and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance A using the table for determining the type of advanced performance A shown in FIG. 12-21 (B) (step 241SGS312).

As shown in Figure 12-21 (B), in the table for determining the type of development performance A, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 12-21 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 10 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 90 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a super reach, a judgment value of 80 is assigned to "not execute" and a judgment value of 20 is assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for a normal reach, a judgment value of 100 is assigned to "not execute". In other words, when a normal reach is a miss, it does not develop into a weak super reach performance, so development performance A is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach or normal reach is missed, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the probability of a jackpot is higher when development performance A is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 12-21(A), in step 241SGS313, the type of advanced performance A determined in step 241SGS312 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS313). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS314, where the advanced performance A start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS314), and the process ends.

Returning to Figure 12-18, after executing the processing of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 checks whether the fluctuation pattern in the variable display is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279), and if it is a super reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; Y), it executes the development suggestion performance type determination processing shown in Figure 12-22 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development suggestion performance in the variable display (step 241SGS280), executes the development performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 12-23 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the development performance B in the variable display (step 241SGS281), and executes the deciding performance B type determination processing shown in Figure 12-24 (A) to determine the performance pattern (performance type) of the deciding performance in the variable display (step 241SGS282). If it is not a super reach fluctuation pattern, that is, if it is a normal reach fluctuation pattern (step 241SGS279; N), proceed to step 241SGS283.

As shown in FIG. 12-22(A), in the development suggestion performance type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS321). The variable display result can be identified by a variable display result designation command stored in a variable display result designation command storage area for storing a variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, special chance jackpot A, special chance jackpot B, special chance jackpot C, non-special chance jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by a variation pattern designation command stored in a variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the development suggestion performance, and determines the performance pattern of the development suggestion performance using the development suggestion performance type determination table shown in Figure 12-22 (B) (step 241SGS322).

As shown in Figure 12-22 (B), in the table for determining the type of development suggestion performance, different judgment values are assigned to each of "Pattern PS-1", "Pattern PS-2", "Pattern PS-3", and "Pattern PS-4" when the variable display result is a sure chance jackpot (sure chance jackpot A, sure chance jackpot B, or sure chance jackpot C), when it is a non-sure chance jackpot, when it is a super reach miss, or when it is a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 12-20 (A) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4". When the variable display result is a super reach miss, 50 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-1", 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-2", 15 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-3", and 5 judgment values are assigned to "pattern PS-4".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-4" is determined most frequently, if it results in a non-guaranteed jackpot, "Pattern PS-3" is determined most frequently, and if it results in a super reach miss, "Pattern PS-1" is determined most frequently. In other words, "Pattern PS-4" has the highest jackpot expectation, with the jackpot expectation decreasing in the order of "Pattern PS-4" > "Pattern PS-3" > "Pattern PS-2" > "Pattern PS-1". The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 12-22(A), in step 241SGS323, the type of development suggestion effect determined in step 241SGS322 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS323). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS324, where the development suggestion effect start waiting timer is set to the period until the effect starts (step 241SGS324), and the process ends.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-23(A), in the development performance B type determination process, the performance control CPU 120 first identifies the variable display result and the variation pattern (step 241SGS331). The variable display result can be identified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area for storing the variable display result designation command for designating the variable display result (miss, variable probability jackpot A, variable probability jackpot B, variable probability jackpot C, non-variable probability jackpot, small win) sent from the main board 11 at the start of the variable display. In addition, the variation pattern can be identified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area, as described above. In addition, in this feature section 241SG, since the target of the preview performance is normal reach and super reach, specifically, the variable display result designation command is used to specify whether the variable display result is a jackpot (probable jackpot A, probable jackpot B, probable jackpot C, non-probable jackpot) or a miss, and the variable pattern designation command is used to specify whether the variation pattern is a normal reach or a super reach. Note that the case of probable jackpot C may be excluded as a target of the preview performance.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 extracts a random number for determining the advanced performance and determines the performance pattern of advanced performance B using the table for determining the advanced performance B type shown in FIG. 12-23 (B) (step 241SGS332).

As shown in Figure 12-23 (B), in the table for determining the type of advanced performance B, for each of the patterns of "non-execution" and "execution", different judgment values are assigned for the cases where the variable display result is a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), a non-special jackpot, a super reach miss, or a normal reach miss, so that the judgment value numbers shown in Figure 12-23 (B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 20 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 80 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach β or γ, 30 judgment values are assigned to "not execute" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "execute". When the variable display result is a miss for Super Reach α, 100 judgment values are assigned to "not execute". In other words, when Super Reach α is a miss, it does not develop into a strong Super Reach performance, so development performance B is not executed.

By assigning the judgment values in this way, when the variable display results in a guaranteed jackpot or non-guaranteed jackpot, "execute" is determined with the highest probability, and when the super reach misses or normal reach misses, "non-execute" is determined with the highest probability. In other words, the expectation of a jackpot is higher when development performance B is executed than when it is not executed. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

Returning to FIG. 12-23(A), in step 241SGS333, the type of advanced performance B determined in step 241SGS332 is stored in a specified area of RAM 122 (step 241SGS333). Then, the process proceeds to step 241SGS334, where the advanced performance B start waiting timer is set to the period until the start of the performance (step 241SGS334), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-24(A), in the process of determining the type of final effect, the CPU 120 for controlling the effect determines the pattern of the final effect using the table for determining the type of final effect shown in FIG. 12-24(B) based on the variable display result identified in step 241SGS301 (step 241SGS341). Next, the determined type of final effect is stored in a specified area of the RAM 122 (step 241SGS342), the timer waiting for the start of the final effect is set to the period until the start of the effect (step 241SGS343), and the process ends.

As shown in FIG. 12-24(B), in the deciding effect type determination table, for "Pattern KB-1" and "Pattern KB-2" which display an operation prompt to encourage the player to press the push button 31B once by enabling the operation of the push button 31B, and "Pattern KV-1" and "Pattern KV-2" which display an operation prompt to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A once by enabling the operation of the stick controller 31A, different judgment values are assigned to the variable display results when the variable display results in a special jackpot (special jackpot A, special jackpot B, or special jackpot C), when the variable display results in a non-special jackpot, or when the super reach is missed, so that the judgment value numbers shown in FIG. 12-24(B) are assigned.

Specifically, when the variable display result is a guaranteed jackpot, 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a non-guaranteed jackpot, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-2" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-2". When the variable display result is a miss for the Super Reach β/γ, 70 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KB-1" and 30 judgment values are assigned to "pattern KV-1".

By assigning the judgment values in this way, if a sure-win occurs in the variable display, "Pattern KV-1" in which the control object is the stick controller 31A is determined most frequently, if a sure-win occurs but a non-sure-win occurs, "Pattern KB-2" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently, and if a super reach is missed, "Pattern KB-1" in which the control object is the push button 31B is determined most frequently. In other words, the probability of a sure-win is higher when the stick controller 31A is the control object than when the push button 31B is the control object. The above determination ratios can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the random numbers for determining the preview performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance A, the random numbers for determining the development hint performance, the random numbers for determining the development performance B, and the random numbers for determining the final performance are each set to random numbers in the range of 1 to 100, and one of the values in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. In other words, the number of judgment values for these various performance determination random numbers is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the range of these various performance determination random numbers can be determined appropriately. Also, a performance determination random number counter for generating these various performance determination random numbers is set in RAM 122, and this performance determination random number counter is updated at each timer interruption in the random number update process. Also, a common random number may be used for these various performance determination random numbers.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, an example of determining the performance pattern of various performances in the various performance type determination process has been given, but the present invention is not limited to this, and in addition to the above-mentioned performances, it is also possible to determine the execution of preview performances such as a character preview performance in which a character appears, a step-up preview in which the preview image changes in stages, and a group preview in which a group of specified characters crosses the display area.When determining these different types of preview performances, the timing to start the preview performance differs depending on the type of preview performance, so a different period depending on the type of preview performance can be set in the preview performance start waiting timer described below.

Returning to FIG. 12-18, in step 241SGS283, the performance control CPU 120 selects a performance control pattern (process table) according to the variable pattern designation command. Then, it starts the process timer for process data 1 of the selected process table (step 241SGS284).

In addition, in the process table, display control execution data for controlling the display of the image display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, sound control execution data for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and operation unit control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and stick controller 31A are arranged in chronological order in correspondence with each process data n (numbers 1 to N).

Then, the performance control CPU 120 executes control of the performance device (image display device 5 as a performance component, various lamps as performance components, speakers 8L, 8R as performance components, and operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.)) according to the contents of process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1) (step 241SGS285). For example, to display an image corresponding to a fluctuation pattern on the image display device 5, it outputs a command to the display control unit 123. It also outputs a control signal (lamp control execution data) to the lamp control board 14 to control the lighting/extinguishing of various lamps. It also outputs a control signal (sound number data) to the sound control board 13 to output sound from the speakers 8L, 8R.

In addition, in this feature section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 controls the display of the decorative pattern to vary according to a variation pattern that corresponds one-to-one to the variation pattern designation command, but the performance control CPU 120 may select the variation pattern to be used from multiple types of variation patterns that correspond to the variation pattern designation command.

Then, the variable display time timer is set to a value equivalent to the variable display time specified by the variable pattern designation command (step 241SGS286). A predetermined time is also set to the variable display control timer (step 241SGS287). The predetermined time is, for example, 33 ms, and the performance control CPU 120 writes image data being variably displayed, including image data showing the display state of the left, center, and right decorative patterns, to the VRAM each time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 outputs a signal corresponding to the image data written to the VRAM to the image display device 5, which then displays an image corresponding to the signal. This realizes the variable display of the decorative patterns and the display of videos of other performances.

Next, the performance control CPU 120 sets the value of the performance control process flag to a value corresponding to the performance processing during variable display (step S172), and ends the variable display start setting processing (step 241SGS288).

(Example of Super Reach β performance)
Next, a description will be given of an example of the performance of the Super Reach β based on FIG. 12-25 to FIG. 12-31. FIG. 12-25 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the Super Reach β mainly in the normal reach. FIG. 12-26 (A) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 12-27 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the weak Super Reach. FIG. 12-28 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 12-29 (E) to (J) are diagrams showing examples of the performance of the strong Super Reach. FIG. 12-30 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing examples of the performance after the big win confirmation notification. FIG. 12-31 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing details of the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display. FIG. 12-32 is a diagram showing the relationship between the light-emitting display unit and the mounted movable body LED.

Below, we will explain various examples of performance actions during the variable display period based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β.

As shown in FIG. 12-25(A), the performance control CPU 120 starts the variable display of the decorative symbols in each of the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R based on the variable pattern of the Super Reach β, which is based on the occurrence of a start winning win. In addition, the upper left corner of the display area of the image display device 5 is provided with a display area 5SL for displaying the first reserved memory number (e.g., the number "2"), the second reserved memory number (e.g., the number "0"), and a small symbol corresponding to the decorative symbol (e.g., an arrow "↓↓↓"), and the small symbol is variably displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the decorative symbol.

The first and second reserved memory numbers, small symbols, and error display (not shown) indicating an error state that has occurred in the pachinko game machine 1 are displayed in front of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (higher layer), preventing the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first reserved memory number, the second reserved memory number, small symbols, and error display. On the other hand, the decorative symbols are displayed behind the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 (lower layer), preventing the decorative symbols from overlapping and reducing the visibility of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200.

After the variable display starts, as shown in FIG. 12-25(B), if the variable display mode is set to the normal reach display mode, the normal reach presentation starts as a variable display presentation of the decorative pattern.

As shown in FIG. 12-25(C), at the start timing of the preview performance A when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays the second pseudo movable object display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, then moves it to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 12-25(D)), and as shown in FIG. 12-25(E), the light-emitting display units Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a display color corresponding to the pattern (any of PYA-1-4) determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278A, thereby executing the preview performance A that suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state. In addition, an effect image Z60 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo movable object display Z200.

The effect image Z60 is displayed in a manner that corresponds to the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E. For example, when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in white based on pattern PYA-1, the effect image Z60 is white and has a small display size, and when the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E are displayed in red based on pattern PYA-4, the effect image Z60 is red and preferably has a large display size according to the degree of expectation.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-25 (F), the effect image Z60 is erased, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, thereby ending the preview performance A. After that, a reduced decorative pattern is displayed in a slightly larger form than the small pattern in the display area 5SR provided in the upper right corner of the display area of the image display device 5.

If it is decided not to execute development performance A in the development performance A type determination process of step 241SGS278B, as shown in FIG. 12-25(G), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 is not dropped but is kept in the origin position, and a development notification image Z300 is displayed, and an effect image Z61A is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance. If it is decided to execute development performance A, as shown in FIG. 12-25(H), at the start timing of development performance A, the mounted movable body solenoids 207L, 207R are turned on, and the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position, and an effect image Z61B different from the effect image Z61A for emphasizing the mounted movable body 32 is displayed around it, to notify that it will develop into a weak super reach performance.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher when the drop of the mounted movable body 32 is executed as development performance A than when it is not executed, but even if it has been decided not to execute development performance A (drop of the mounted movable body 32), the development notification image Z300 can be displayed to notify the player that the performance will progress to a weak super reach performance.

As shown in FIG. 12-26(A), after the execution period of development performance A ends, the performance control CPU 120 starts the weak super reach performance by displaying the character image Z310, and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and then moves and displays it at the first specific performance display position, starting the development suggestion performance (see FIG. 12-26(B)). At this time, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed so that a part of it overlaps with the front side of the character image Z310.

In addition, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved to the first specific display position as a development suggestion effect, the light-emitting display sections Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in white, and the button LED 62 of the push button 31B is lit up to encourage the operation of the push button 31B.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-26(C), an effect image Z62 for emphasizing the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200. Then, if one of the patterns (PS-2 to 4) is determined in the development suggestion performance type determination process of step 241SGS280, as shown in FIG. 12-26(D), the effect image Z62 is enlarged according to the number of repeated taps of the push button 31B during the effective operation period (the number of operations detected), and the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display sections Z208A to Z208E is changed every time a predetermined time has passed, thereby indicating that development performance B will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 12-26(E), even after the effective operation period has ended, the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E is maintained, and the background image is darkened to display a blackout. After that, a small-sized character image Z310 is displayed in the upper position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in the same color as the light-emitting display color of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E when the effective operation period has ended, and an effect image Z63 for highlighting the character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 12-26(F)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 12-26(G)), a medium-sized character image Z310 is then displayed (see FIG. 12-26(H)), the character image Z310 is temporarily erased while the effect image Z63 is displayed (see FIG. 12-26(I)), and then a large-sized character image Z310 is displayed (see FIG. 12-26(J)).

In addition, in Figures 12-26 (E) to (J), taking into consideration the appearance of the presentation, it is preferable to continue the illumination of the illumination display units Z208A to Z208E, but not display the effect image Z62.

In this way, the character image Z310, which is the same color as the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E, is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size from the back of the screen to the front, and when small, medium, and large sized character images Z310 are displayed, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 12-26 (J) in FIG. 12-27, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is overlapped with at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, so that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be seen through the overlapping area, thereby more effectively building up anticipation for the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, since the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, the display of the character image Z310 can appropriately suggest that development performance B will be executed, while diverting the player's attention from the fact that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 will be erased without being moved to the first specific initial display position.

In addition, while the character image Z310 is displayed in a manner that gradually increases in size, it may also be displayed so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 in an area including the first specific performance display position of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the start of display. In addition, the effect image Z63 may also be displayed as a suggestion image so as to overlap at least a portion of the front side of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. Specifically, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is hidden by being gradually faded out as a display to emphasize that it has been erased. After that, the large-sized character image Z310 is erased by being gradually faded out.

In the characteristic section 241SG, as shown in FIG. 12-27(A), the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the large-sized character image Z310 is being displayed, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 may be erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while the character image Z310 is being displayed when the display of the character image Z310 is started, or when a predetermined time has elapsed since the display was started, as shown in FIG. 12-26(F).

Furthermore, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is not limited to being erased (hidden) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, but may be erased (hidden) by moving the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position while fading out.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-27(B), at the start timing of the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position. Here, if it is determined in the development performance B type determination process of step 241SGS281 that development performance B will not be executed, as shown in FIG. 12-27(C), the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 is erased without being moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, and the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined form (for example, a form at the start of display with high transparency and low visibility), thereby announcing that the development will progress to a strong super reach.

On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 12-27(D), when it is decided to execute the development performance B, the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position to notify that it will develop into a strong super reach. At this time, as shown in the enlarged view, the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E are illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., white) when moving, and the rotating display part Z207 including the light-emitting display parts Z208A-Z208E is displayed in a manner that rotates clockwise when viewed from the front. In addition, an effect image Z65 for emphasizing the second pseudo movable object display Z200 is displayed around the second pseudo movable object display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position.

The light-emitting display colors of the light-emitting display units Z208A to Z208E in FIG. 12-27(D) are different from the development suggestion effects and do not indicate the likelihood of a jackpot, but are light-emitting display colors that correspond to the colors of the effect images Z65, etc., displayed on the image display device 5 as images of the weak reach effects.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-27(E), the reach title image Z51 described later is displayed in a predetermined state (for example, a state at the start of display in which the transmittance is high and the visibility is low), and then, as shown in FIG. 12-27(F), the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased (not displayed) without being moved from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-28(A), when the variable display mode is set to the super reach display mode, the performance control CPU 120 displays a reach title indicating the type of super reach performance and a reach title image Z51 indicating the expected jackpot probability, and notifies the player that the performance has progressed to the super reach performance. Next, the super reach performance (for example, a performance displaying an image Z52 in which an ally character and an enemy character battle (confront)) is started (see FIG. 12-28(B)). Then, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the super reach display mode was set, if the patterns KB-1 and KB-2 have been determined in the performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the push button 31B, an operation prompting image Z53 is displayed to prompt the player to press the push button 31B, as shown in FIG. 12-28(C). On the other hand, if the patterns KV-1 and KV-2 have been determined in the final performance type determination process of step 241SGS282, that is, if the operation target is the stick controller 31A, an operation prompting image Z54 is displayed to encourage the player to pull the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 12-28(D).

When the operation prompt display is displayed during the operation effective period, at the timing when the push operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting the push operation of the push button 31B or the pull operation of the stick controller 31A, if the variable display result is a jackpot, as shown in FIG. 12-29 (E), a movable body performance is executed in which the mounted movable body 32 falls from the origin position to the performance position in front of the display area, and the effect image Z55 is displayed. In addition, in response to the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated in a predetermined color (for example, rainbow color, etc.).

Effect image Z55 is an effect image including a plurality of glass fragment images displayed in a manner in which glass cracks and scatters, and is exemplified in a manner similar to effect image Z71 described below, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image in a manner different from effect image Z71 may be used. For example, by displaying only a portion of the glass cracking and scattering into fragments, while leaving the remaining portion intact, it is possible to make it easier for the player to understand what has happened over some time, even in a situation in which the mounted movable body 32 overlaps with effect image Z55 displayed on the image display device 5 and the display is difficult to see.

Furthermore, in effect image Z55, similar to effect image Z71 described below, by reflecting a portion of the mounted movable body 32 arranged in front of the image display device 5 in at least one of the multiple glass fragment images displayed in a scattering manner, the positional relationship between the mounted movable body 32 and the glass fragment image becomes clearer, thereby realizing a more three-dimensional display.

After that, the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, and then, as shown in FIG. 12-29(F), an image Z56 is displayed indicating that the friendly character has won the battle against the enemy character, and then, as shown in FIG. 12-29(G), the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot. Note that even if the combination of jackpot symbols is temporarily displayed, the small symbols remain variably displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-30(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and glass fragments scatter in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-30(B), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, and the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D are changed from the first performance display state to the second performance display state. In addition, in response to the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, a predetermined sound effect is output from the speakers 8L, 8R, and the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated in a predetermined color (e.g., rainbow colors) in the same way as when the mounted movable body 32 is dropped in FIG. 12-29(E).

Here, the details of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position described in Figures 12-30 (A) and (B) are described in Figure 12-31.

As shown in FIG. 12-31(A), the performance control CPU 120 displays an effect image Z71 including an image Z71A showing glass cracking and scattering into multiple pieces of glass in the display area of the image display device 5, and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position. The performance control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 so that a portion of it is visible below the mounted movable body 32 held in the origin position. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-31(B), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in the first intermediate display position between the first initial display position and the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of the images Z71A showing the glass fragments are increased compared to the state shown in FIG. 12-31(A), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in front of these images Z71A.

Next, as shown in Figures 12-31 (C) and (D), when the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, the amount and movement display speed of images Z71A showing glass fragments are further increased than in the state shown in Figure 12-31 (B), and these images Z71A are displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

In this way, in response to the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, an effect image Z71 for emphasizing the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, and only the image Z71A showing glass fragments in the effect image Z71 is displayed moving from the back side to the front side of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby not only creating a three-dimensional effect with the image Z71A scattering around, but also making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 look as if it were a real structure.

Furthermore, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 12-31(C), the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed so as to be visible through one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, or as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 12-31(D), a portion of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be reflected and displayed in one of the multiple images Z71A displayed in front of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, thereby making the positional relationship between the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the image Z71A clearer, thereby realizing a display with a more three-dimensional feel.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-31 (D), the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, then changes the performance movable display units Z110A-Z110D from the first performance display state to the second performance display state, and executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 12-32, after the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves to the first performance display position, the performance control CPU 120 repeats a blinking display pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated for a first period ta1 to ta2 (e.g., 33 ms) and then hidden for a second period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., 33 ms), while repeating a blinking pattern multiple times during the performance periods ta1 to ta4 during which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed at the first performance display position, in which the mounted movable body LED 208 is illuminated for a first corresponding period (e.g., 30 ms) corresponding to the first period and then turned off for a second corresponding period (e.g., 40 ms) corresponding to the second period.

In this way, by executing (synchronizing) the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, the performance can be more appropriately enhanced. Even if it is difficult to accurately match (synchronize) the time during which the light-emitting display unit Z108A is illuminated (e.g., 33 ms) and the time during which the mounted movable body LED 208 is turned on (e.g., 30 ms) during the first period ta1-ta2, it is possible to prevent the deviation between the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 from becoming large over time, for example, by making the off period of the mounted movable body LED 208 longer than the on period.

In addition, during the performance periods ta1 to ta4, a vibration performance may be executed in which the vibration motor 61 is driven to vibrate the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A. In this way, the performance can be made more exciting. The driving of the vibration motor 61 may be synchronized with the light-emitting display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A and the lighting of the mounted movable body LED 208.

Returning to FIG. 12-30(C), the performance control CPU 120 returns the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the second performance display state to the first performance display state, ends the reduced display of the decorative symbols, and temporarily stops and displays them in the decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-30(D), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves upward, and as shown in FIG. 12-30(E), it moves and displays it to the first performance display position and then erases it. Then, the combination of confirmed decorative symbols is stopped and the small symbols are also stopped and displayed in the combination of jackpot symbols.

In this way, after executing the effect of dropping the mounted movable body 32 to notify the player of a confirmed jackpot, the effect of moving the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is executed, allowing the player to more effectively experience the feeling that the game is being controlled into a jackpot gaming state.

Returning to FIG. 12-29, if the variable display result is a miss at the timing when a single press operation of the push button 31B (detection signal from the push sensor 35B) or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A (detection signal from the stick controller 31A) is detected during the operation effective period in which the operation prompt display is displayed, or at the timing when the operation effective period ends without detecting a single press operation of the push button 31B or a single pull operation of the stick controller 31A, as shown in FIG. 12-29(H), the movable body performance of dropping the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position above the display area of the image display device 5 to the performance position in front of the display area is not executed, and an effect image Z57 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 12-29(I), an image Z58 indicating that the friendly character has lost the battle with the enemy character is displayed, and then, as shown in FIG. 12-29(J), a miss pattern combination is displayed as a stop to notify the confirmed miss. Also, in synchronization with the stop display of the miss pattern combination, the small patterns are displayed as the miss pattern combination.

For example, a difference in scale will occur between when push button 31B is operated at the start of the valid operation period and when push button 31B is not operated during the valid operation period. Therefore, the difference in scale that occurs at the timing of operating push button 31B may be absorbed by extending or shortening any of the following periods: 1. the period during which the decorative pattern shakes until the pattern is determined; 2. the display period of images Z55 to Z58; or 3. the performance period of the movable body performance.

(Example of Super Reach γ performance)
Next, an example of the performance of the Super Reach γ will be described with reference to Fig. 12-33 to Fig. 12-34. Fig. 12-33 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ. Fig. 12-34 (A) to (F) are diagrams showing an example of the performance of the advance notice performance B in the Super Reach γ.

Below, we will explain an example of the performance of preview performance B executed in the normal reach performance in the Super Reach γ fluctuation pattern. The flow from the start of the variable display to the start of the normal reach performance is the same as that of Super Reach β, so we will not explain it here. Note that Super Reach γ is a fluctuation pattern that is selected only when the game state is in a high base state.

As shown in FIG. 12-33(A), when pattern PYB-1 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was set, and then moving and displaying it at the second intermediate performance display position (see FIG. 12-33(B)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second intermediate performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L at the second intermediate performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5L.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-33(C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second intermediate performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 12-33(D), when pattern PYB-2 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 at the second specific initial display position at the start of preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second specific performance display position (see FIG. 12-33(E)). In addition, an effect image Z81 is displayed around the second pseudo-movable object display Z200 that has been moved and displayed at the second specific performance display position to highlight the second pseudo-movable object display Z200.

The second pseudo movable body display Z200 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C at the second specific performance display position, making it difficult to see the decorative pattern variably displayed in the decorative pattern display area 5C.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-33 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 without moving it from the second specific performance display position to the second specific initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 12-34(A), when pattern PYB-3 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the first initial display position at the start timing of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the first performance display position (see FIG. 12-34(B)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the first performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the first performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (C), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the first performance display position to the first initial display position.

As shown in FIG. 12-34(D), when pattern PYB-4 is determined in the preview performance type determination process of step 241SGS278B, the performance control CPU 120 executes the preview performance B, which suggests that the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, by displaying the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 at the second initial display position at the start of the preview performance B when a predetermined time has elapsed since the normal reach display mode was selected, and then moving and displaying it at the second performance display position (see FIG. 12-34(E)). In addition, an effect image Z82 is displayed around the first pseudo-movable object display Z100 that has been moved and displayed at the second performance display position to highlight the first pseudo-movable object display Z100.

The first pseudo movable body display Z100 is displayed overlapping the front side of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R at the second performance display position, making it difficult to see some of the decorative patterns variably displayed in the decorative pattern display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R.

Then, as shown in FIG. 12-34 (F), the performance control CPU 120 erases (hides) the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without moving it from the second performance display position to the second initial display position.

(Pseudo moving object display and moving object)
Next, the pseudo movable body display and the movable body will be described based on Fig. 12-35 to Fig. 12-40. Fig. 12-35 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 12-36 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 12-37 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 12-38 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 12-39 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the pseudo movable body display with a non-mounted movable body. Fig. 12-40 is an explanatory diagram for comparing the first pseudo movable body display with the second pseudo movable body display.

As shown in FIG. 12-35, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a pseudo movable body display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which differs from the mounted movable body 32 in shape, weight, drive mechanism, etc., as described in FIG. 12-14 (B), but the first initial display position and the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 are both approximately the same position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5, and the first performance display position and the performance position of the mounted movable body 32 are both positions lower than the first initial display position and the origin position, so the direction of movement from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and the direction of movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position are both downward. In other words, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the mounted movable body 32 are both movable downward from the first initial display position and the origin position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5.

As explained in FIG. 12-16, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position (L2>L1).

As shown in Figures 12-35 (A') to (C'), the mounted movable body 32 takes approximately 300 ms to fall (move) under its own weight from the upper origin position through the intermediate position to the lower performance position, whereas the first pseudo movable body display Z100 takes approximately 100 ms to move from the first initial display position through the first intermediate display position to the first performance display position, as shown in Figures 12-35 (A) to (C). In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position has a longer movement display distance and is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position.

In this way, when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, can be displayed moving in the same direction from approximately the same position as the mounted movable body 32 as a structure that can move in the same direction as the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., downward), the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position can be made faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from its origin position to its performance position, thereby making it possible to produce an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 that is actually mounted, thereby surprising the player.

Next, as shown in Figures 12-36 (A') and (B'), the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a display that imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which, when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position that is lower than the first origin position, stops as the mechanical part M100B abuts against the upper part of the movable body M106 and restricts downward movement, and performs a recoil action (bounce) of a predetermined amount of movement due to the vibration that occurs when the movement is restricted.

As a result, as shown in Figures 12-36 (A) and (B), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and stops and displays it at the first performance display position, it performs a recoil action display (bounce display) of a specific amount of movement.

More specifically, the first non-mounted movable body M100 has a cantilever structure in which only the left side of the performance part M100A is supported by the drive mechanism M101, and when it moves to the first performance position, the mechanism part M100B abuts against the upper part of the moving body M106, restricting downward movement, so that a recoil action due to vibration occurs in the mechanism part M100B before the performance part M100A, and then the vibration is transmitted to the performance part M100A, causing a recoil action.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 12-36 (B1), when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, it first displays the recoil action of the mechanism unit M100B, and then displays the recoil action of the performance unit M100A, as shown in FIG. 12-36 (B2). By doing this, it is possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100, which imitates the first non-mounted movable body M100, which is different from the mounted movable body 32, in a more realistic manner (for example, a manner different from the display imitating the mounted movable body 32).

Also, as shown in Figures 12-36 (C') and (D'), the mounted movable body 32 is structured so that the left and right sides of the performance part 32A are supported by the drive mechanisms 101L and 101R, and when it moves to the performance position, the mechanism part 32B comes into contact with the upper parts of the left and right moving bodies 206, restricting downward movement, and a recoil action of a predetermined amount of movement is performed due to the vibrations that occur when the movement is restricted.

Next, we will explain the operation of the mounted movable body 32 and the first pseudo movable body during the final performance.

As explained in Figures 12-28 to 12-30, the performance control CPU 120 executes a movable body performance in which the mounted movable body 32 is dropped from the origin position to the performance position during the execution period (ta0 to ta10) of the deciding performance, and then performs a pseudo-movable body display in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position to notify of a confirmed jackpot.

In more detail, as shown in FIG. 12-37(A), the presentation control CPU 120 starts the deciding presentation at timing ta0, and then drops the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the presentation position at timing ta1 when it detects the operation of the stick controller 31A or push button 31B by the player within the effective operation period. The mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position during the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2, and then performs a recoil action during the period ta2 to ta3 (e.g., about 700 ms).

Then, at timing ta4, the mounted movable body 32 is moved (raised) from the presentation position to the origin position, and a jackpot confirmation notification is issued. Here, the period TL3 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta4 to ta5 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is longer than the period TL1 (e.g., about 300 ms) from timing ta1 to ta2 during which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the presentation position. In other words, the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the presentation position to the origin position is slower than the speed at which the mounted movable body 32 moves (falls) from the origin position to the presentation position.

In this way, in a performance using the mounted movable body 32, which is a structure, when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position in response to detection of the player's operation, it is possible to give an impact to the player by having it fall quickly under its own weight, while when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, it is possible to prevent the mounted movable body 32 from being damaged by impact by moving it slowly.

Then, at timing ta6, when a predetermined time has elapsed since the big win confirmation notification, the presentation control CPU 120 displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the first initial display position, and during the period TL2 from timing ta6 to ta7 (e.g., about 100 ms), moves it from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then performs a recoil action display during the period ta7 to ta8 (e.g., about 900 ms).

After that, at timing ta9, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved (raised) from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, and then the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is erased. Here, the period TL4 (e.g., about 1000 ms) from timing ta9 to ta10 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is longer than the period TL2 (e.g., about 100 ms) from timing ta6 to ta7 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position. In other words, the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first performance display position to the first initial display position is slower than the speed at which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position.

In this way, by making the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position faster than the movement display from the first performance display position to the first initial display position, in the same way as the mounted movable body 32, it is possible to make the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 move in a more realistic manner.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-37(B), when comparing the amount of movement L2 (movement display distance L2) per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position with the amount of movement L1A per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, the amount of movement L2 per unit time TL2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is greater than the amount of movement L1A per unit time TL2 of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32 from the origin position to the performance position. In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can perform an impactful performance faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, which can give the player a surprise.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-37(C), the movement amount L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position. Also, the number of times the first pseudo movable body display Z100 displays the recoil action (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the mounted movable body 32 displays the recoil action (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, a performance that leaves an impression on the player can be provided.

Also, as shown in Figures 12-38 (A) and (B), the movement display distance L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is the same as the movement display distance L2 of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the period TL2 during which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is shorter than the period TL10 during which the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position (TL2 < TL10). Therefore, the movement amount L2 per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the movement amount per unit time (e.g., TL2) when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. In other words, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 from the first origin position to the first performance position. By doing this, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can create an impactful performance that is faster than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, which can surprise the player.

Also, as shown in FIG. 12-38(C), the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L11 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the origin position to the performance position, and the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. Also, the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (e.g., six times) is greater than the number of times the recoil action is displayed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 (e.g., four times). In this way, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 or the mounted movable body 32 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first performance position or when the mounted movable body 32 moves to the performance position, it is possible to provide an effect that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the comparison between the predetermined movement amount in the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32 or the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the specific movement amount in the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is a comparison between the first recoil action and the recoil action display, but it may be a comparison between any of the second or subsequent recoil actions and the recoil action display, or a comparison between the total or average movement amount of multiple recoil actions and the total or average movement amount of the recoil action display.

The recoil action has been exemplified as an action in which the movable body jumps upward due to the recoil when it stops at the second position, but it also includes deformation or vibration of a specific part of the movable body due to the recoil.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-39(A), when the mounted movable body 32 is moved from the performance position to the origin position, or when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first performance position to the first origin position, driving sources such as the mounted movable body motors 202L, 202R and M101 are used, so the performance control CPU 120 increases the control speed of the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 during a first period from timing tb1 when the movement starts to timing tb2, keeps it constant during a period from timing tb2 to timing tb3, and decreases it during a second period from timing tb3 to timing tb4. In other words, the mounted movable body 32 and the first non-mounted movable body M100 accelerate from the start of movement until the first period has elapsed, then move at a constant speed, and decelerate and stop during a second period just before the stop position.

In contrast, the speed at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed is constant from the time tb1 when the movement starts to the time tb4 when the movement stops, as shown in Figure 12-39 (B), and a first period for accelerating the display of the movement and a second period for decelerating the display of the movement are not required, so the display of the movement of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the mounted movable body 32.

Next, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 will be explained using Figure 12-40.

As shown in Figures 12-40 (A) to (C), when creating a video in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first performance display position, are required.

On the other hand, as shown in Figures 12-40 (A') to (B'), when creating a video in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from a first specific initial display position to a first specific performance display position, at least a first frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific initial display position, and a second frame, which is an input image for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at the first specific performance display position, are required.

As explained in FIG. 12-16, the moving display distance L2 is the moving display distance from the first initial display position of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and the moving display distance L3 is the moving display distance L2 from the first specific initial display position of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position. The moving display distance L2 is longer than the moving display distance L3, but the time required to move the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is about 100 ms, while the time required to move the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position is about 800 ms, so the moving display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the moving display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first performance display position.

Here, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 12-40(A) and then the second frame shown in FIG. 12-40(C) in that order, but this would result in a low frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, one interpolation frame shown in FIG. 12-40 (B) is inserted between the first and second frames as an input image for displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 at the first intermediate display position, thereby increasing the number of frames in the video and raising the frame rate, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is performed in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, thereby enabling a natural and smooth movement display.

In this way, even when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving at high speed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position, by inserting at least one interpolation frame between the first frame and the second frame to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility.

On the other hand, when the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, it is also possible to display the first frame shown in FIG. 12-40 (A') and then the second frame shown in FIG. 12-40 (B'), but this would result in a lower frame rate and a jerky, unnatural movement.

Therefore, between the first and second frames, multiple interpolation frames (not shown) are inserted as input images for displaying the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 at multiple first intermediate display positions between the first specific initial display position and the first specific performance display position, thereby increasing the number of frames of the video and increasing the frame rate to achieve a natural and smooth moving display, and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position in the order of the first specific initial display position, each of the first intermediate display positions, and the first specific performance display position for each display frame, thereby making it possible to display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 moving at a slower speed than the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without reducing visibility.

In addition, for example, in the preview performance B, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, and when pattern PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are controlled to the jackpot game state at different rates can be recognized by the difference in the speed of the movement display.

In addition, when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed, the rate at which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is controlled to a jackpot state (expected jackpot probability) is higher than when patterns PBY-1 and PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position are executed, which allows attention to be drawn to the moving display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as shown in Figures 12-34 (D) to (E), when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second initial display position to the second performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the second performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

In addition, as shown in Figures 12-33 (A) to (B), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate performance display position and stopped at the second intermediate performance display position, or as shown in Figures 12-33 (D) to (E), when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed on the image display device 5 from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position and stopped at the second specific performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement may be performed.

Furthermore, it is preferable that the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate display position or the second specific display position in the preview performance B has a larger amount of movement than the recoil action display performed when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific display position in the preview performance A. By doing this, the amount of movement in the preview performance B is larger than that of the preview performance A, so that the movement can be displayed in a more realistic manner.

In addition, it is preferable that the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in pattern PBY-3 of the preview performance B or after the jackpot announcement in the deciding performance is greater in amount of movement than the recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves from the second initial display position to the second performance display position in pattern PBY-4 of the preview performance B. By doing this, the recoil action display is larger when it moves downward than when it moves upward, so it is possible to display the movement in a more realistic manner.

(Action and Effects)
As described above, in the pachinko game machine 1 in the characteristic portion 241SG, the direction in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance position and the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position are both downward, and the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2.
According to this feature, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can produce an impactful effect that is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 32, thereby surprising the player.
In addition, it is possible to display movement at a speed that is difficult to achieve with the mounted movable body 32, or at a plurality of speeds, thereby enabling diversification of the presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the speed of movement of the mounted movable body 32, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a comparison of the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 with the speed of movement of the first non-mounted movable body M100, or a comparison of the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the speed of movement of the second non-mounted movable body M200. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the movement display of the pseudo movable body display and the speed of movement of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is a display imitating the first non-mounted movable body M100 which performs a recoil action of a predetermined amount when moved from the first origin position to the first performance position, and the performance control CPU 120 is capable of moving and displaying the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in the vertical direction between a first initial display position corresponding to the first origin position and a first performance display position corresponding to the first performance position on the image display device 5, and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position and then stopped and displayed at the first performance display position, a recoil action display (bounce display) of a predetermined amount of movement is performed, and the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display performed when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display performed when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved and displayed from the first origin position to the first performance position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 makes it possible to simulate an effect similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying in an exaggerated manner the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 moves to the first effect position, it is possible to provide an effect that will leave a lasting impression on the player.

In the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is compared with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the first non-mounted movable body M100, but the present invention is not limited to this, and may also be a comparison of the recoil action display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the amount of movement of the recoil action of the second non-mounted movable body M200, or a comparison of the recoil action display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 with the recoil action of the mounted movable body 32. In other words, as long as the comparison is between the amount of movement of the recoil action display of the pseudo movable body display and the recoil action of the movable body, the type of pseudo movable body display and the movable body to be compared may be changed arbitrarily.

In addition, during the variable display period of the pattern based on the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach β or Super Reach γ, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state (jackpot expectation) is higher when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed than when development performance B is executed without execution of development performance A.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the execution of development performance A, which is a movable body performance, and development performance B, which is a pseudo-movable body display performance.
In addition, when development performance A using the mounted movable body 32 and development performance B using the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are executed, the probability of being controlled to a jackpot game state is higher than when development performance A is not executed and development performance B is executed, this includes being controlled to a jackpot game state 100% of the time when development performance A and development performance B are executed.

In addition, it is possible to execute a preview performance A which predicts the possibility (expectation level) that the variable display result will be a jackpot, a development performance B which notifies that it will develop into a strong super reach performance, and a development suggestion performance which suggests the possibility that the development performance B will be executed. In the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific performance display position, and then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then hidden. In the development performance B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific performance display position, and then hidden without moving and displaying from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific performance display position before executing the development performance B and displayed at the first specific initial display position is hidden, a character image Z310 can be displayed in the display area including the first specific performance display position.
According to this feature, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body as a structure, so that the player can focus on whether or not it will be controlled to an advantageous state without feeling any discomfort, while in the development suggestion performance, the display of the character image Z310 is prioritized over the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 being displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, and the character image Z310 is hidden without returning from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, so that the player can focus on the suggestion of the execution of the development performance B.

In addition, it is possible to execute a deciding effect which notifies the player whether or not the game will be controlled to a jackpot game state, and a development effect B which notifies the player that the deciding effect will be executed by developing into a strong super reach effect. When the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development effect B, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific effect display position, and then is made invisible without being moved and displayed from the first specific effect display position to the first specific initial display position, and the state at the start of the display of the reach title image Z51 which suggests the execution of the development effect B can be displayed in a display area including the first specific effect display position. When the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding effect, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed from the first initial display position to the first effect display position, and then is made invisible.
According to this feature, before the deciding performance is executed, the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 prioritizes displaying the suggestive image over displaying it in the same way as a movable body as a structure, and is hidden without returning it from the second display position to the first display position, so that the player can be drawn to the suggestion of the execution of the deciding performance.On the other hand, during the deciding performance, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is displayed moving in the same way as a movable body, so that the player can be drawn to the notification of content that is advantageous to the player without feeling uncomfortable.
In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed in the development performance B (specific performance), and the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed in the deciding performance (special performance), but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to move a pseudo-movable body display that is common to the specific performance and the special performance.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position for each display frame in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position, and can display a specific image that emphasizes the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 (for example, an effect image Z71 in which glass cracks and image Z71A showing multiple glass fragments scatters) in a display area including the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position.
According to this feature, the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving quickly without reducing visibility, and the moving display can be emphasized with a specific image to make a good impression on the player.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 performs the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position in the order of the first initial display position, the first intermediate display position, and the first performance display position for each display frame, and the movement display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is faster than the movement display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, in the preview performance B. The rate at which the jackpot state is controlled (the probability of a jackpot) differs between when pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or pattern PBY-4 in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the second initial display position to the second performance display position is executed and when patterns PBY-1 or PBY-2 in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific initial display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed.
According to this feature, it is possible to draw the player's attention to whether the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed as moving, and it is also possible for the player to recognize that the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, which have different proportions of being controlled to a jackpot game state, are displayed at different speeds of movement.
In addition, in the preview performance B, when the pattern PBY-3 in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position or the pattern PBY-4 in which the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved from the second specific performance display position to the second specific performance display position or the second intermediate performance display position is executed, the rate at which the pseudo movable body display Z200 is controlled to the jackpot state (the probability of winning) is different. This includes cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot state is 100% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed, and cases where the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 100% when pattern PBY-1 or pattern PBY-2 is executed in the preview performance B, and the rate of being controlled to the jackpot game state is 0% when pattern PBY-3 or pattern PBY-4 is executed.

In addition, by making the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 display images having not only the performance display parts Z100A, Z200A but also the mechanism display parts Z100B, Z200B, etc., it is possible to more realistically represent the movable body operated by the drive mechanism and realize a movable body display performance similar to a movable body performance, while with regard to the movement display, it is possible not only to display the movement in a manner similar to the movement of the movable body, but also to display the movement in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body due to reasons such as the mechanism becoming complicated or the cost becoming high, thereby suitably improving the interest of the performance.

Furthermore, in characteristic section 241SG, examples of movement display in a manner that is difficult to achieve with a movable body include high-speed movement, deformed display, and erasing (not displaying) the display without returning from the performance display position to the initial display position. However, by realistically expressing the display manner of the pseudo-movable body display while displaying the movement display unrealistically, it is possible to provide a surprising performance.

In particular, the pseudo-movable body display that has been moved to the performance display position can be made invisible or visible at the desired timing, which has the effect of increasing the freedom of performance design, for example by avoiding a decrease in visibility due to other performance images being hidden when the movable body as a structure that has been moved to the performance position is returned to the origin position, making it possible to start the next performance immediately.

In addition, the amount of movement L12 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is greater than the amount of movement L13 of the first recoil action display that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved from the first origin position to the first performance position. This makes it possible to simulate a performance similar to that of the first non-mounted movable body M100 by using the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 without mounting the first non-mounted movable body M100, and by displaying the recoil action that occurs when the first non-mounted movable body M100 is moved to the first performance position in an exaggerated manner, it is possible to provide a performance that leaves an impression on the player.

In addition, the moving display distance L2 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position is longer than the moving distance L1 from the origin position to the performance position, so the first pseudo movable body display Z100 has a faster moving speed and a longer moving distance than the mounted movable body 32, and therefore can provide a performance that leaves a lasting impression on the player.

The pseudo-movable body display also includes performance display units Z100A, Z200A and mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B, and in the movement display of the pseudo-movable body display, the mechanism display units Z100B, Z200B reach the first performance display position before the performance display units Z100A, Z200A, allowing the pseudo-movable body display to be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the movement amount L2 of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 per unit time TL2 is greater than the movement amount L1A of the mounted movable body 32 per unit time TL2, so that the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be displayed moving in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the period of movement of the mounted movable body 32 between the origin position and the performance position includes a first period in which the speed increases and a second period in which the speed decreases, and the period of movement display of the pseudo movable body display does not include the first period and the second period, so that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be performed more smoothly than the movement of the movable body.

In addition, after the presentation control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first presentation position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby drawing the player's attention to the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that has been moved and displayed to the first presentation display position.

In addition, the performance control CPU 120 does not illuminate the light-emitting display unit Z108A when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is being displayed moving, thereby making the incomplete first pseudo-movable body display Z100 that is being displayed moving less noticeable, thereby preventing a decrease in the performance effect.

In addition, after the performance control CPU 120 moves and displays the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance position, it executes the illumination of the mounted movable body LED 208 and the illumination display of the light-emitting display unit Z108A at approximately the same cycle, thereby making it possible to move and display the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 in a more realistic manner.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move and display the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 from the second specific initial display position to the second intermediate presentation display position or the second specific presentation display position, and the downward direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific presentation display position in the preview presentation A is different from the right direction in which the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the second specific initial display position to the second specific presentation display position in the preview presentation B. This makes it possible to move and display one pseudo-movable body display from multiple display positions, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that is difficult to achieve with a movable body.

In addition, the presentation control CPU 120 can move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first presentation display position, thereby providing the player with a surprising presentation that would be difficult to achieve with a movable body.

(Variation 1)
Next, a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 12-41. Fig. 12-41 (A) to (D) are diagrams showing a first modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

As explained in FIG. 12-25, in the characteristic part 241SG, in the preview performance A, the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is moved and displayed from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position, then moved and displayed from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position, and then erased, and then, as the development performance A, the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position.

Here, as shown in FIG. 12-41 (D), when the movable range of the mounted movable body 32 and the movable range of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 overlap in part, that is, when the mounted movable body 32 that has been moved to the performance position overlaps with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 that has been moved to the first specific performance display position, if the performance control CPU 120 executes the movement of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position and the movement and display of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 to the first specific performance display position in a common period, the mounted movable body 32 overlaps in front of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it difficult to see the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, making it easy to see that the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is a display body and not a structure, reducing the interest of the performance.

In such a case, as shown in FIG. 12-41(A), the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is displayed at the first specific initial display position, and then moved from the first specific initial display position to the first specific performance display position (see FIG. 12-41(B)), and then erased without moving from the first specific performance display position to the first specific initial display position (see FIG. 12-41(C)). This avoids the mounted movable body 32, which has moved from the origin position to the performance position as advanced performance A, from overlapping with the second pseudo-movable body display Z200, as shown in FIG. 12-41(D).

(Variation 2)
Next, a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 12-42. Fig. 12-42 (A) to (H) are diagrams showing a second modified example of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic portion 241SG, a form has been exemplified in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 32 moves from the origin position to the performance position and the direction in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 moves and displays from the first initial display position to the first performance display position are the same direction (downward), but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in a case in which the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 moves between the first position and a second position lower than the first position and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 moves and displays between the first display position and a second display position higher than the first display position are the same direction (for example, up and down), it is sufficient that the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position is faster than the movement of the mounted movable body 401 from the first position to the second position.

In addition, the direction in which the mounted movable body 401 moves from the first position to the second position (downward) and the direction in which the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position (upward) may be different directions.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 and the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are not executed in a common period, but the present invention is not limited to this, and as in this modified example 2, the movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402 may be executed in a common period, making it possible to execute a performance using the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402.

To be more specific, as shown in FIG. 12-42, the mounted movable body 401 as modified example 2 is a structure on which the character "合" is displayed, and is movable between a first position at the top of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second position below the first position, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R as modified example 2 are movable between a first predetermined position on the left or right side of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second predetermined position closer to the center than the first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 as modified example 2 is capable of displaying the character "体" and is movable and displayed between a first display position at the bottom of the display area of the image display device 5 and a second display position above the first display position. Note that detailed illustrations and descriptions of the drive mechanisms of the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are omitted.

For example, when the performance control CPU 120 executes a performance using the mounted movable bodies 401, 501L, 501R and the pseudo-movable body display Z402 in the above-mentioned preview performances A and B or development performances A and B, it first waits at the first position as shown in FIG. 12-42(A), displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 at the first display position as shown in FIG. 12-42(B), and then moves and displays the pseudo-movable body display Z402 from the first display position to the second display position as shown in FIG. 12-42(C).

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-42 (D), the mounted movable body 401 is moved from the first position toward the second position. Then, when the mounted movable body 401 moves to a position close to the pseudo movable body display Z402 displayed at the second display position, the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed toward the first display position. At this time, it is preferable to move and display the mounted movable body 401 so that it does not overlap with the pseudo movable body display Z402.

Next, as shown in FIG. 12-42(E), when the mounted movable body 401 moves to the second position and the pseudo movable body display Z402 moves and displays to the first display position, the mounted movable body 401 is closest to the pseudo movable body display Z402, resulting in a pseudo-combined state in which the word "combined" can be recognized. Then, as shown in FIG. 12-42(F), while maintaining the pseudo-combined state between the mounted movable body 401 and the pseudo movable body display Z402, the mounted movable body 401 is moved upward and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed upward, and further, the mounted movable bodies 501L and 501R are moved to the second predetermined position, thereby announcing that the pseudo-combination has been successful and the performance will develop.

After that, as shown in FIG. 12-42 (G), the mounted movable body 401 and the mounted movable bodies 501L, 501R are moved to a first position or a first predetermined position, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is moved and displayed in a manner in which the image is divided to a first specific display position (e.g., a position on the left or right side) different from the first display position, and then it is erased by framing out to the left or right of the screen or fading out.

On the other hand, if it has been decided to notify that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress, as shown in FIG. 12-42 (D), the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 is decelerated and stopped midway through the downward movement of the mounted movable body 401 and the downward movement display of the pseudo movable body display Z402, and the pseudo movable body display Z402 is displayed in a manner in which the upper part is destroyed, thereby notifying that the pseudo merging has not been successful and the performance will not progress. In this way, the pseudo movable body display Z402 can easily realize performances in a manner that is difficult to realize with a movable body as a structure.

(Variation 3)
Next, a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG will be described with reference to Fig. 12-43. Fig. 12-43 (A) to (C) are diagrams showing a third modification of the characteristic portion 241SG.

In the characteristic section 241SG, the performance control CPU 120 has exemplified a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 can be moved between the first display position and the second display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is not limited to a form in which the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 can be moved back and forth in one direction, such as up and down or left and right. For example, the performance control CPU 120 may move the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figures 12-43 (A) and (B), and then move it in a direction different from the direction in which it moves from the first initial display position to the first performance display position as shown in Figure 12-43 (C).

As shown in FIG. 12-43(C), it is preferable to be able to execute various types of movement displays, such as displaying only the performance display unit Z200A in vertical rotation around a rotation axis facing left and right at the first performance display position, which is a rotational movement display different from a linear movement display facing one direction, or a movement display in a manner that moves in a direction different from the one direction (for example, the depth direction). In this way, it is possible to provide the player with unexpected effects that are difficult to achieve with a movable body.

The characteristic feature 241SG in the embodiment of the present invention has been described above with reference to the drawings, but the specific configuration is not limited to these examples, and the present invention also includes modifications and additions that do not deviate from the gist of the present invention.

(Explanation of Modifications and Applications)
In the characteristic portion 241SG, the mounted movable body 32 is exemplified as a movable body mounted on the pachinko game machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a plurality of movable bodies other than the mounted movable body 32 may be mounted on the pachinko game machine 1. In addition, the movable body is not limited to the board-side movable body provided on the game board 2, but may be a frame-side movable body provided on the game machine frame 3 or an opening/closing door that can open and close the game machine frame 3, and a pseudo-movable body display imitating the frame-side movable body may be movable and displayed. In addition, as the board-side movable body, a pseudo-movable body display imitating a variable winning device provided in relation to the game may be displayed.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, an example is given of a form in which the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 are applied as movable bodies that were planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted, but the present invention is not limited to this, and movable bodies other than the first non-mounted movable body M100 and the second non-mounted movable body M200 may be planned to be mounted on the pachinko gaming machine 1 but ended up not being mounted.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, when the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 is erased, an example is given of a form in which it is made invisible by gradually fading out, but the present invention is not limited to this, and an effect image emphasizing that it has been erased may be displayed, or it may be erased by a method other than these.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position is shorter than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and a common effect image Z71 of glass cracking and glass fragments scattering is displayed and a common sound effect is output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed, respectively. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the movement distance L1 from the origin position of the mounted movable body 32 to the performance position may be longer than the movement display distance L2 from the first initial display position of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 to the first performance display position, and different effect images may be displayed and different sound effects may be output when the mounted movable body 32 moves and when the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 is moved and displayed. By doing this, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be emphasized by using the movement display of the pseudo movable body display.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, during the variable display period of the super reach, the movement of the mounted movable body 32 can be executed a maximum of two times for the development performance A and the deciding performance, the movement display of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 can be executed a maximum of two times for the preview performance B and the deciding performance, and the movement display of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be executed a maximum of four times for the preview performance A, the preview performance B, the development suggestion performance, and the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of times the movement of the movable body and the movement display of the pseudo movable body display can be executed may be executed a number of times other than the above.

Furthermore, when the movable body is allowed to move a first number of times in one variable display period, it is preferable to allow the pseudo movable body display to move a second number of times, which is greater than the first number, in one variable display period. By doing this, it is possible to avoid increasing the number of opportunities for the movable body performance to be performed too much, which would lower the expectation of a jackpot, and instead to prevent a decrease in interest due to fewer performances by increasing the number of opportunities for the pseudo movable body display to be performed.

In addition to the above multiple effects, for example, when the pattern is promoted in the re-draw after the jackpot confirmation notification or during the jackpot, the pseudo-movable body display may be moved, and the pseudo-movable body display that is moved at that time may be a pseudo-movable body display different from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

In addition, an example has been given in which a preview effect A is applied as a special suggestion effect suggesting that control will be made into an advantageous state, a development effect B is applied as a notification effect notifying the player of content that is advantageous to the player, a development suggestion effect is applied as a predetermined effect suggesting that a notification effect will be executed, a decision effect is applied as a special effect notifying that control will be made into an advantageous state, and a preview effect B is applied as a specific effect suggesting that the special effect will be executed before the special effect is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this and various other effects can be applied. In addition, although these various effects can be executed during the variable display period of one Super Reach, they may also be effects that can be executed across multiple variable display periods.

In addition, in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, the contents that are advantageous to the player may include variable display results, controls, and effects such as pseudo consecutive wins, big wins, small wins, reach, reserved consecutive wins, chance-up effects, foresight notice effects, misses with time-saving, and ceiling time-saving control, which will be described later. In the case of the slot machine, the contents may include chance zone (CZ) wins, assist time (AT) wins, replay time (RT) wins, bonus wins, and the like.

In addition, in the characteristic part 241SG, when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is started, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is lowered or turned off, thereby making the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 stand out, while when the display of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 is erased, the brightness of the game effect lamps 9 provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3 is increased or turned on, thereby diverting the player's attention from the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200.

Furthermore, in the characteristic portion 241SG, it is preferable that while the player is able to adjust the light intensity of the game effect lamps 9 and the like provided on the game board 2 and the game machine frame 3, the player is not able to adjust the light intensity of the light-emitting display portion Z108A of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the light-emitting display portions Z208A to Z208E of the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the appearance of the pseudo-movable body display from being impaired or becoming less noticeable.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, when the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 displayed at the first specific initial display position is made invisible in the development suggestion performance, an example is given of a form in which the character image Z310 is preferentially displayed as the notification-related image in the display area including the first specific performance display position, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification-related image may be an image other than a character image (for example, an image imitating smoke, fog, waves, etc.) as long as it is an image related to the notification performance (for example, development performance B).

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the reach title image Z51 is displayed in the state it is in when the display starts as a suggestive image that suggests the execution of a deciding performance in the development performance B, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the suggestive image may be an image other than a reach title image (for example, a character image that appears in a strong super reach performance or a deciding performance) as long as it suggests the execution of a deciding performance.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, an example is given in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 can be displayed in separate periods, but the present invention is not limited to this, and multiple pseudo movable body displays may be moved and displayed in a common period. In this case, for example, when the movable displayable range of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the movable displayable range of the second pseudo movable body display Z200 overlap, and the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 are displayed in the overlapping area, by displaying one of the first pseudo movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo movable body display Z200 on a display layer closer to the viewer than the other, the viewer can be made aware of the relative front-to-back positions of each other, thereby realizing a more realistic presentation.

In addition, in the characteristic portion 241SG, taking into consideration that the mechanism display portions Z100B, Z200B of the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 and the second pseudo-movable body display Z200 are displayed cut off at the edges of the display area of the image display device 5, the mounted movable body or a center decorative frame, etc. may be arranged so as to cover the portion in the display area of the image display device 5 where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins, or the mounted movable body may be moved to make it difficult to see the portion where the display of the mechanism display portion of the pseudo-movable body display begins.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, an example was given of a form in which the display result of the variable display includes "miss with time reduction", but the CPU 103 may be able to execute ceiling time reduction control, which controls to the time reduction state without going through the jackpot game state, based on the variable display having been performed a specified number of times (e.g., 900 times) since a specified condition (e.g., performing a clearing process to clear flags, counters, and buffers stored in RAM 102 in the initialization process of step S6, controlling to the jackpot game state, or setting the display result to miss with time reduction) being met. The internal count of the specified number of times is reset when the specified condition is met, and the number of time reductions in the time reduction state due to the ceiling time reduction control (e.g., 900 times) may be different from the number of time reductions in the normal time reduction state (e.g., 100 times).

When the above-mentioned ceiling time-saving control is executed and the number of times the variable display is executed reaches the above-mentioned specified number of times without the above-mentioned predetermined condition being met, the performance control CPU 120 may be able to execute the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display such as the first pseudo-movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo-movable body display Z200. In this way, the moving display of the pseudo-movable body display may be executed in each notification such as a jackpot notification, a time-saving miss notification, and a ceiling time-saving control notification, and the type of pseudo-movable body display and the manner of the moving display may be different in each notification.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a form in which the first pseudo movable body display Z100 is moved to notify of a jackpot has been exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the variable display result is a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or if the above-mentioned ceiling time reduction control is executed, the first pseudo movable body display Z100 or the second pseudo movable body display Z200 may be moved to notify of a small jackpot or a miss with time reduction, or to notify that the conditions for executing the ceiling time reduction control have been met, while if the variable display result is a jackpot, the mounted movable body 32 may be moved to notify of a jackpot.

Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a common type of pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the manner of the moving display may be different.Also, when the display result of the variable display is a small win or a miss with time reduction, and when the display result of the variable display is a big win, a pseudo-moving body display is used to notify, but the type of pseudo-moving body display may be different.

In addition, in the characteristic section 241SG, a pachinko gaming machine that can be controlled to a high probability state after a jackpot game ends is used as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it may be a so-called type 1/type 2 gaming machine that can be controlled to a jackpot game state by a V winning occurring as a result of a small jackpot in the time-saving state after a jackpot game ends, and the gameplay can be changed in various ways.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko game machine 1 is given as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the present invention can also be applied to so-called sealed game machines in which a predetermined number of game balls are enclosed inside the game machine so that they can be circulated, and the number of loaned balls loaned in response to a loan request by a player and the number of prize balls awarded in response to winning are added, while the number of game balls used in the game is subtracted and stored. In these sealed game machines, scores or points are awarded to the player rather than game balls, and these awarded scores or points correspond to the game value.

In addition, in the above embodiment, spherical gaming balls (pachinko balls) were used as an example of gaming media, but the gaming media is not limited to spherical gaming media and may be non-spherical gaming media such as medals.

In addition, in the above embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine was applied as an example of a gaming machine, but the present invention can also be applied to a slot machine in which, for example, a game can be started by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using gaming value, one game ends when a variable display result is derived from a variable display device that can variably display multiple types of identifiable patterns, and a prize can be won depending on the variable display result derived from the variable display device.

The gaming machine of the present invention can also be applied to slot machines and other enclosed gaming machines that enclose gaming media and award points based on winning. In addition, a gaming machine capable of playing games is one that at least allows playing games, and is not limited to pachinko gaming machines or slot machines, and may be a general game machine.

1 Pachinko game machine 4A First special symbol display device 4B Second special symbol display device 5 Image display device 32 Mounted movable body 100 Game control microcomputer 103 CPU
120 Performance control CPU

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state that is advantageous to a player,
a suggestion performance execution means capable of executing a plurality of types of suggestion performances including a first suggestion performance, a second suggestion performance, a third suggestion performance, and a fourth suggestion performance as suggestion performances that suggest control to the advantageous state;
a development performance execution means capable of executing a first development performance before the performance result of the first suggestion performance is notified, and capable of executing a second development performance different from the first development performance after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a performance result of the second suggestion performance;
A chance-up effect execution means for executing a chance-up effect in which the degree of expectation controlled to the advantageous state varies depending on the number of times the effect is executed during the execution of the suggestion effect;
A revival special performance execution means capable of executing a revival special performance that notifies the player that the advantageous state will be controlled after the suggestion performance is executed and a performance result is notified that the advantageous state will not be controlled;
a display means for moving and displaying a pseudo movable body display from a first display position to a second display position different from the first display position;
A special effect execution means capable of executing a special effect that notifies the player that the game is controlled to the advantageous state;
A specific performance execution means capable of executing a specific performance before the special performance is executed;
Equipped with
The suggestion performance execution means includes:
The third suggestion performance can be executed after the first development performance is executed,
The fourth suggestion performance can be executed after the second development performance is executed,
The chance-up effect execution means includes:
the chance-up effect can be executed so that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the third suggestion effect is being executed without being notified that the advantageous state will not be reached as a result of the first suggestion effect is greater than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the first suggestion effect is being executed;
the chance-up effect can be executed such that the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the fourth suggestion effect is being executed after it has been notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a result of the second suggestion effect is equal to or less than the number of times that the chance-up effect is executed when the second suggestion effect is being executed;
A first period during which the revival special effect is executed is shorter than a second period during which the fourth suggestion effect ends after it is notified that the advantageous state will not be achieved as a result of the second suggestion effect,
The display means includes:
The pseudo movable body display can be moved and displayed in the specific performance and the special performance,
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved in the specific performance, the pseudo-movable object display can be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then hidden without being moved from the second display position to the first display position, and a suggestion image suggesting the execution of the special performance can be displayed in a display area including the second display position;
When the pseudo-movable object display is moved during the special performance, the pseudo-movable object display may be moved from the first display position to the second display position, and then moved from the second display position to the first display position before being hidden.
A gaming machine characterized by:

Images